Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (194 trang)

gi¸o ¸n tiõng anh 6 n¨m häc 2009 2010 date 10 8 2009 period 1 english 6 introduction a objectives by the end of this lesson ss will be able to introduce yourself i knowledge ” hi hello” “ i’m my n

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (804.51 KB, 194 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Date: 10.8.2009


Period : 1

<b>ENGLISH 6 INTRODUCTION</b>


<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to introduce yourself</b>
<b> I. Knowledge:” Hi? Hello” “ I’m…../ My name’s…”</b>


Numbers 0 -5
<b> II. Skills: Speaking and writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II. Checking: Simon say:</b>


III. New Lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Present the student book:</b>


T.asks Ss to open the text book and makes
some questions.-Questions:


How many units are there in English book?-T.
tells more about the allocation of the book.


<i>“There are 16 units in your book. ach unit is </i>
<i>divided into from 5 to six periods. Besides, </i>
<i>there are Grammar Practice period classes </i>
<i>after each three units for further practice and </i>
<i>consolidate the knowledge you have studied. </i>
<i>And you are going to have two One-Period </i>


<i>Tests after each three units, too. In addition to </i>
<i>the textbook, you also have your workbook. </i>
<i>Doing the exercises in the book helping you </i>
<i>have a chance to revise your studied points. It’s</i>
<i>really helpful.”</i>


<b>2.Present the classroom basic imperatives:</b>
-Teacher statements:-“How do you say the
word in English?”


“Who know the word in Vietnamese? ”-“Which
is strong? “


“Tell me in Vietnamese?”-“What’s another
word for “…” ? “ What’s the opposite of
“…”?”


“Stand up, please! / Sit down
please!”-“Everyone, repeat!”


“Go to the board, please”-“Raise your hand,
please”


Ss look at the book and answer T’s
questions.-There are 16 units


Ss practice T’s imperatives
Ss practice T’s imperatives


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


“Keep silent, please / Be quiet,


please!”-“Listen!”


“Repeat/ Again / Listen and repeat”-“Who
can?”


“Give me some examples”-“Learn by heart
vocabulary”


“Answer my question.”
Simon says:


T.asks Ss to play the game for some
imperatives revision.


<b>3. Some common initials ( abbreviations):</b>
N - Noun (danh từ)-
Pro - Pronoun (đại từ)


Adj - Adjective (tính từ)- Adv -
Adverb (trạng từ)


Pre - Preposion (giới từ)- V -
Verb (động từ)


Det - Determiner (hạn định từ)-
BE - British English


AE - American English-4.Gives the


<b>class regulations:</b>


(In Vietnamese)-T.asks students to rebuild the
class regulations.


T.adds some more:-“You have to prepare your
lesson and doing your homework in advance at
home before going to school.


<b>V. Consolidation:</b>


Revise some studied classroom imperatives.
<b>V. Homework:</b>


Prepare Unit 1(A1- I4)


<i> +How to introduce yourself with “Hello/Hi…./My name’s…….”</i>
<i> + Numbers 0 - 5</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

Period : 2

<b>Unit 1: GREETINGS</b>


<i>Lesson 1: A 1-4 P 10 -11</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to introduce yourself</b>
<b> I. Knowledge:” Hi? Hello” “ I’m…../ My name’s…”</b>


Numbers 0 -5
<b> II. Skills: Speaking and writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I. Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II. Checking: Simon say:</b>


<b> III. New Lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation(1)</b>


<i>*Pre-Teach</i>:


Hello : <i>(Translation)</i>


Hi : <i> (Translation)</i>


name (n) : <i> (Translation)</i>


I (pro) : <i>(Translation)</i>


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress and the
meaning.


<i>*Checking vocab</i>: R.O.R


<i>*Dialogue build</i>:


a. <i>Lan </i>: Hi, I am Lan
<i> Nga</i>: Hi, I am Nga
b<i>.Hello</i>: My name is Ba



<i>Nam</i>: Hello. My name is Nam


T. elicits models choral individual SS
work in opned closed pairs.


<b>2. Presentation(2):</b>


+ Pre teach: Present number 0-5:
Oh: 0 Three: 3
One:1 Four: 4
Two:2 Five: 5
+Checking: Slap the boarb
<b>3. Practice:</b>


*<i>Dictation</i>:T reads: Oh- Five- One- Two….
*Word Cue Drill:


Use some words cue to write telephone


Ss answer- listen to T.- repeat
chorally-ind.-answer-copy down into the
notebook.


Ss answer- listen to T.- repeat
chorally-ind.-open-closed pairs.


<i>For example:</i>


Hi, I am Lan



SS listen and repeat in chorus and
individually


And then copy down into their notebooks


-SS work in group: A-B


-Each group has 6 students with the
numbers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
numbers


<i>Quang Ninh/ 33 Hue/054 Ha Noi / 04</i>
<i> Hai Phong/ 031 Da Nang / 0511 </i>


* <i>Example Exchange</i>:


<i><b> T: Quang Ninh, please.</b></i>
<i><b> S : Oh- Three- Three</b></i>


<b>4. Further Practice: Guessing game*</b>


T.uses the words cue drill cards-Students guess
the numbers


* <i>Example Exchange</i>:
<b> S1: Oh- Three- Three</b>


S2: No



S3: Oh-Five- One-One
S2: Yes


Ss work ind-in pairs- in groups-some read
alound the answer.


Ss work ind.- in pairs.


<b> IV.Consolidation: Exercise 1 P.4 (workbook)</b>


* T. asks Ss to complete the dialogue with missing words.
<b> V.Homework:</b>


<b>- Complete exercise 4 P. 3 into the notebook.</b>


- Do the numbers 1, 2 page 4 (in work book)


- Revise ”Hi / Hello” “ I’m…../ My name’s…” to greet each other and numbers 0 -5.
<b> - Prepare Unit 1: Greetings A5-8 ( P 12- 13 )</b>


<i>(“How are you? ” “ I’m fine.Thanks” to greet each other and numbers 6-10 )</i>


Date: 15. 8.2009


Period: 3

<b> Unit 1</b>

<b>:</b>

<b>GREETINGS</b>



<i> Lesson 2 : A 5 – 8 (P. 12-13)</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>



<i>By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to ask and answer the question: How are you?</i>
<i>And the answer : I am fine, thanks- Numbers from 6 to 10.</i>


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


- How are you? “I am five, thanks” to greet each other
-Number 6-10


<b>II.Skills: Speaking,writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting</b>


-Check the attendance
<b> II.Checking: -Check number 0 to 5</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
+ Pre teach:


<i><b> </b></i> How? :


Fine (Adj): (meaning)
You (pro): (meaning)
Thanks : (meaning)
Miss: (meaning)
Mr: (meaning)



T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.
+<i>Checking</i>: What and where:


<b> </b><i>How</i><b> </b><i>Fine</i><b> </b>


<i> Thanks </i>




<i>Miss</i> <i>You</i>


T. explains models asks Ss to work in 2 groups
-feedback.


+R.O. R dialogue:


<i><b>Lan</b>: </i>Hi, Lan
<i><b>Nga</b></i>: Hi, Nga
<i><b>Lan</b></i>: How are you?


<i><b>Nga</b>:</i> I am fine, thanks. And you?
<i> <b>Lan</b>:</i>Fine,thanks


T. models choral individual T. has Ss recall
the dilogue and then asks Ss to work in opened
closed pairs.


<i> *Model Sentences: </i>



How are you?


I am fine, thank you.


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board T. does checks.


<b>2. Practice: </b><i><b> A 6 and 7 P.12-13</b></i>


T.runs through – T. models - asks Ss to work in
pairs to greet each other, using the pictures.


<i>*ExampleExchange</i>


<i>Miss Hoa</i> : Hello, Mr Hung.
How are you?


<i>Mr Hung</i> : Hi, I’m fine.Thanks.


Ss answer and then listen to T. Ss
repeat chorally then ind.


Ss answer the questions, then copy
down into the notebook.


Ss work with the whole class to revise
the studied vocabs in 2 teams.





Ss listen to T. repeat chorally ind.
recall the dialogue copy down into
the notebook. work in pairs.




Ss answer listen to T. repeat
chorally ind. answer copy down
into the notebook.


Ss look at the pictures listen to T. Ss
work in open closed pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
3. Revision: Jumbled words:


* Given jumbled cues:


Wot Etrhe
Ifev Rofu
Eno Ho


T. models asks Ss to work ind ind groups. T.
gives the feedback.


*<i><b>Example</b></i>:Ho = <i>Oh</i>


4.Presentation 2:
+ Pre- teach:



Six: 6 Seven: 7 Eight: 8 Nine: 9 Ten: 10
T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.


<i>* Checking</i>: Slap the board


<b>5. Practice: Dictation: </b>


T. asks students to listen and write down the
numbers in English these telephone numbers.


<i><b> </b></i>820.029 950.443 22.653
621.590 510.682 768.527
<b>3.Further Practice: </b><i><b>Exercise 3/15(textbook)</b></i>


T. asks Ss to complete the dialogue b/w Nam and
Linh ind in pairs in groups.


T. models.


<i><b>Nam</b></i>: Hello.My name is Nam.


<i>*</i>Answer<i>:</i>


<i>Nam:</i> Hello.My <i><b>name</b>is</i> Nam.


<i>Linh</i>: Hi, Nam.I’m <i><b>Linh</b></i>.How <i><b>are</b></i> you?


<i>Nam</i>: I <i><b>am</b><b>fine</b></i>,thank you.And you?



<i>Linh</i>: <i><b>Fine</b></i>, thanks.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs with the complete
dialogue.


Ss look at T’s model, then work ind.
in groups- some go to the board and
write down on the board or read aloud
in front of the class.


*<i>Answer</i>:
2 8
5 4
1 0


Ss answer listen to T. repeat
chorally ind. answer copy down into
the notebook.


Ss work ind. in pairs in groups
with the numbers. And stand up
reading the read numbers.


Ss work ind in pairs in groups filling
the gaps with suitable words.


Ss stand up and read alound the
answers.


Ss copy into the notebook.



Ss stand up and practice the dialogue
in pairs in front of the class.


<b> IV.Consolidation: Write</b>


*<i>Exercise 4 P. 5 (workbook)</i>


* T. saks Ss to complete the dialogue the dialogue with missing words.
<b> V.Homework:</b>


- Exercise 4 P.15.


- Memmorize vocab.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- Prepare Unit 1 : Greeting B1- 6 P. 14- 16.


<i>( Good morning/afternoon…..; Numbers 11-15)</i>


Date: 20.8.2009


Period: 4

UNIT 1 : GREETINGS


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 3: B 1- 6 ( P.14- 16 )</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to greet each other.</b>
<b> I.Knowledge: *“Good afternoon / Good morning ………“</b>


<i><b> </b></i> * Numbers from 10 to 15.
II.Skills: Speaking, Writing



<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: </b>


* S1 : How are you ?
Fine, thanks
*S2 Number: 6 to 10
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation (1)</b>
a. Pre teach:


<i><b> </b></i>Good morning ( picture)
Good afternoon: (picture)
Good everning: ( picture)
Good night: (Meaning)
Good bye/ Bye: (Mine)
Children: ( picture)


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.


<i>*</i>Checking: What and where


b.Presentation Dialogue: B3 P.15


T. asks Ss to listen to the text b/t Miss Hoa and


the children.


<b>2.Practice: *</b><i><b>Picture drill: B 2 P.14</b></i>


T. runs through the pictures models.
* Example Exchange:
a. S1: Good morning.


S2: Good morning.


T. asks Ss to practice greeting each other in
pairs.


T. gives the feedback.


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


Ss listen to the dialogue.


Ss look at the pictures listen to T.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

c. Written Exercise: B4 P. 16


T. write the open dialogue on the board


T. runs through asks Ss to work in ind in
pairs, filling in the blanks with the missing
words for a completed dialogue.



T. calls some pairs to stand up and practice the
dialogue.


<b>3. Presentation(2)</b>
*Pre-Teach:


Eleven: 11 Fourteen:14
Twelve: 12 Fifteen: 15
Thirteen: 13


<b>2. Practice:</b>
*Picture drill:


7+ 8=… 10+ 2 =… 5+6 =…
7+ 5=… 6+ 8=… 3+ 8= …
<b>3.Further Practice:</b>


*Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve, two,
five, thirteen, eight, eleven, four,fourteen, seven,
ten, fifteen, one, three, oh, nine


Ss work ind in pairs filling the gaps
with suitable words. Then stand up for
the completed dialogue.


Ss work ind to write the words of the
results.


Ss write the numbers ind.



<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise</b> 2 P. 6+7 ( in workbook )


<i> * T asks Ss to write the dialogue b/t Miss Hoan and her children in the correct order.</i>


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise greeting each other with “ Good morning/afternoon….” ; numbers 10- 15.
- Complete the exercise 2/6+7 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 1 : Greeting C1- 4 / 17- 19.


<i> ( Talking about age and numbers 16- 20 )</i>


Date: 23.8.2009


Period: 5

<b>UNIT 1 </b>

<b>: </b>

<b>GREETINGS</b>



<i> Lesson 4: C 1-4 (P.17-19)</i>



<b>A</b><i><b>.</b></i><b>OBJECTIVES</b><i><b>:</b> By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about </i>
<i>age.</i>


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>


* “How old are you?” to talk about age and contract with “How are you?”
* Numbers 16 to 20


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: - How are you? Fine, thanks</b>


- Number: 10 to 15


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation :</b>


<i><b>a. Pre teach:</b></i>


Sixteen: 16 Nineteen: 19
Seventeen: 17 Twenty: 20
Eighteen: 18


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.
* Checking: Slap the boarb:


<b>2. Practice: * Pelmanism</b><i>:</i>


Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen
Nineteen Twenty


16 17 18 19 20
* Slap the board:


10 6 19 7 5
T. models asks Ss to work in 2 teams with
the game feedback



<b>3.Further Practice: </b><i>Bingo*<sub> C 5 P. 19</sub></i>


<b>4.Presntation 2:</b>
a. Vocab:


How old?


* Model sentence:


<i><b> </b></i>How old are you?
I am 12 (years old).


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress and the
meaning.


<i>T. contracts” How old are you?” with “ How</i>
<i>are you”</i>


<b>3.Practice: *Word Cue Drill : C 4 P.19</b>
11 18 21 9 17 12
T. runs through models


* <i>Model Sentences</i>:


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


Ss work in 2 teams with the game.



Ss work in 2 teams of four with the game.
Ss work ind with the numbers.


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
How old are you?


I am eleven(years old)
*Form<i><b>: </b></i> - How old + be + S?
S + be +……( years old).


<i>Use:For asking and answering about the age.</i>


T. asks Ss to work in pairs feedback.


in closed pairs.


Ss stand up and practice in front of the
class.


<b>IV.Consolidation: </b>


<i> *Exercise 3 P 8- 9 (workbook)</i>


T. runs through the opnen dialogue models the first.
*Ex: <i>How old are you?</i>



T. asks Ss to work ind. in pairs in groups.
<b>IV.Homework:</b>


. Memorize vocab.


. Revise “How old are you?” to talk about age.
. Complete Ex 3+4 P 8-10 in workbook


. Prepare Unit 1 Greeting C5+6 P.19
Date: 25. 8.2009


Period: 6

<b>UNIT 1 : GREETINGS</b>



<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 5: C 5-6 P. 9</i>



<b>A</b><i><b>.</b></i><b>Objectives</b><i><b>:</b></i>By the end of this lesson, Sswill be able to count numbers from 1 to 20 and
read the telephone number


<b>I.Knowledge:Further practice in numbers 1-20 to count and give telephone numbers</b>
<b> II.Skill:Speaking</b>


B.procedure:


<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: For S1: T checks the form</b><i>” How old are you?-I’m…..”</i>


S2 :Write the word of the numbers 1-20 on the board.
<b> </b>III.New lesson:



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<b>1.Further practice: a.Pelmanism: </b>
T.uses the cards from lesson 4.


Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen
Nineteen Twenty


16 17 18 19 20
T.explains gets Ss to work in 2 groups.


b. Jumbled words:


TGIEH = Eight<i><b> TRENITEH=</b></i>
LEWTEV=... NEELVE=
YTWNET=…. ETREOUNF=
EEVSN=….… IENTENEN=


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


T. explains gets Ss to work in 2 groups.
T. gives the feedback.


*Answer:


EIGHT THITTEEN
TWELVE ELEVEN
TWENTY FOURTEEN
SEVEN NINETEEN



c.Bingo : C 5 P. 19
T. cheks number 0-20.


Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6, 8, 11,13, 15, 0,
16, 12, 1, 17….


T. call some Ss to stand up and read the
numbers.


<i>d. Dictation and Picture Cue Drill</i>


04842689 054752590


091569742 0511854347


085571321 071837598


033632437 012541659
T. runs through and models.


*Example Exchange:


<i><b>S1: What’s your number?</b></i>


<i><b> S2:(oh-five- one-one, eight-two)</b></i>


T. asks Ss to work in pairs.
<b>2.Production: Survey:</b>



T asks Ss to work in groups of four asking and
ansering filling the table.


T.models with a student.


*Example exchange:


<i><b>T: What is your name?</b></i>
<i><b> S : (Hoa)</b></i>


<i><b> T : What is your number?</b></i>
<i><b> S : ( 033 621 300 )</b></i>


T. has some groups representatives stand up and
read alound the results and T. gives the
comment.


-Work in individially


Ss work ind. listening and writing the
numbers,then share in pairs and in
groups.


Ss look at the board and listen to T,then
work in open closed pairs.


Ss work in groups for filling in the table
with name and telephone numbers.


Name Telephone Number


1. <i>Hoa</i> 033 612 300
2


3
4


Ss stand up and read the results of the
survey.


<b>III.Consolidation: </b><i>( involved)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

- Memorize studied knowledge.
- Exercise 4 P.10 ( workbook )


- Prepare unit 2 At School A1-4 P.20- 22


<i> (Classroom imperatives)</i>


Date : 27. 8. 2009


Period: 7

<b>UNIT 2 : AT SCHOOL</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 1: A1- 4 P. 20 - 22</i>



<b>A</b><i><b>.</b></i><b>Objectives</b><i><b>:</b>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know classroom imperatives and</i>
<i>understand T’s commands .</i>


<b> I.Knowledge: Classroom imperatives</b>
<b> II.Skill: Speaking</b>


<b>B.procedure:</b>



<b> I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance.</b>


<b> II.Revision: </b><i><b>Noughts and Crosses:</b>T. asks ss to work in 2 teams giving the results only.</i>


9 - 5 20 - 7 10 + 2


17 + 1 6 + 4 8 : 4


3 - 1 6 x 3 6 + 3


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ <sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation </b>
a. Pre teach:
(to) sit down:
(to) Stand up :


(to) open your book :
(to) close your book:


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.
+Checking: Slap the boarb:


b.Presentation Text: A2 P.21


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape or T’s model.


* <i>Model sentences</i>:


Come in! * Form: V-inf
Stand up! <i>For giving commands</i>


Sit down!


<b>3.Practice: </b><i>*<b>ACTIVITIES 1</b>:</i> Matching: A2
P.21


T.runs through and T. models.
a) Open your book.


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ <sub>activities</sub></b>


T. asks Ss to work ind then in pairs matching the
pictures with suitable imperatives.


T. call some Ss to stand up and read the answer


<i>*</i>ACTIVITIES 2<i><b>: </b></i>Mime Drill:
Teacher mines:


come in
sit down
Stand up



open your book
close your book


<i><b>* </b></i>ACTIVITIES 3: Simon says : A 3 P . 22
T. saks Ss to work with the whole class with the
game.


4.Further practice:* Mapped dialogue:
Miss Hoa Children


<i>……..morning! ...morning,MissHoa.</i>
<i>How…..? We’re……How……?</i>
<i>Fine...…Sit….. </i>


<i>Open..… Yes,Miss!</i>


T. runs then elicits and models


T. asks Ss to repeat chorally, then ind
T. asks Ss to work in open closed pairs.


T gives the feedback.


<i>Student say:</i>


come in


sit down



stand up


open your book
close your book


-Work in pair


Miss Hoa Children
…..morning……morning.


Ss look at the poster and listen to T.Then
Ss answer T’s questions listen to T’s
model repeat in chorus ind. Ss
work in open closed pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation: ( involved in Further Practice )</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


<b> - Memorize the classroom imperatives.</b>
- Exercise 1 P. 11 (workbook )


- Prepare Unit 2 : At School ( section B 1- 2 P. 23 – 24 )
<i>( Talking about place you live) </i>


Date: 30.8.2009


Period : 8

<b>UNIT 2 : AT SCHOOL</b>


<i> Lesson 2: B1- 2 P. 23 - 24 </i>



<b>A</b><i><b>.</b></i><b>OBJECTIVES</b><i><b>:</b></i>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer the question


to talk about the place about you live.


<b> I.Knowledge: -</b><i>“ Where do you live? – I live…”</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Revision: *Simon says</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation </b>
a. Pre teach:


(to) live: (meaning)
(in) a house: ( picture)
(on) a street ( draw)
(in ) a city ( meaning)


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.


<i><b>* </b></i>Checking<i><b>: R.O.R </b></i>


b.Presentation Dialogue:<i><b> B 1 P. 23</b></i>


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape or T’s model.


<i> * Model sentence:</i>



- Where do you live?
I live on Tran Phu street
at 5 tran Phu street.


in a house/ a city/ Hue/ Viet nam
T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board.


T. does the concept check.
* Form: - Where do you live?


<i> </i>I live <i><b>on</b> + tên đường phố</i>


<i> <b>at</b> + số nhà+tên đường phố</i>
<i> <b>in</b> + địa điểm</i>


<b>2.Practice: </b><i>ACTIVITIES 1</i>: Word cue drill:
a) a city c) HCM city
b) Ha noi d) Le loi street
e) a house f) 3 Le Lai street
T. runs through,then has Ss to work in pairs.
T.gets some Ss to stand up and practice in front
of the class.


<i>Acivity 2</i>: Noughts and crossess:<i><b> (On poster)</b></i>


<i>Hung Vuong</i> <i>Da Nang</i> <i>a city</i>


<i>10 Ha Noi st</i> <i>a houe</i> <i>Nguyen Hue st</i>



<i>Hai Lang</i> <i>Hue city</i> <i>the country</i>


Whole class do after teacher saying


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


Ss listen to the dialogue.


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


* Example exchange:
S1 : Where do you live?
S2 : On (Le Loi street)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>town</i>


T.runs through and models.


Example:<i> S1 : Where do you live ?</i>


<i> S2 : I live on Hung Vuong street.</i>


T.asks Ss to work in 2 groups asking and
answering the place where they live.



Ss listen to T. and then work in 2 teams
with the game.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 4 P. 13</b>


- T. asks Ss to complete the sentences about where “
*Example: I live <i><b>on</b></i> Hang Luoc street.


<b>IV.Homework:</b>


- Learn by heart vocab.


- Memorize asking and answering about the place where you live.
- Complete exercise 4 P. 13 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 2 : At School Section B3- 4 P.24- 25.


<i> ( The alphabet to talk about the name)</i>


Date : 1.9.2009


Period : 9 <i><b> </b></i><b> </b>

<b> UNIT 2 : AT SCHOOL</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i>Lesson 3: B 3 – 4 P.24- 25</i>



<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer the questions to talk about
the names and spell the names



<b> I.Knowledge:</b>


<i>“What is your name?”</i> questions and <i>“How do you spell it?”</i> the alphabet (a-z) to
talk about your name


<b> II.Skill: Speaking</b>
<b>b.procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: - Greeting and check the attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking: </b><i><b> Where do you live?- I live…</b></i>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation </b>
*Pre-Teach:


a b c d e f g h i k l m n o p q
r s t u v w x y z


* Checking: shark attack:


<i>- - - (house) - - - (street) </i>
<i> - - - (open) - - - - (close)</i>
<i> </i>- Bingo*


T.asks Ss to work ind with the alphabet.



Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
* Rub out and Remember Dialogue: B4 P. 25


* Model sentences:


<i><b> </b></i><b>-</b><i><b> </b> What is your name?</i>
<i> I am Lan.</i>


<i> - How do you spell it?</i>
<i> L- A- N , Lan</i>


<b>2.Practice: Word cue drill:</b>


T asks Ss to write their own names on cards to
make the cues for the drill.


<i> Tuấn Hoa Thu</i>


T. models.


* Example Exchange:


<i><b> </b>S1 : What’s your name ?</i>
<i> S2 : I am ( Tuan )</i>


<i> S1 : How do you spell it?</i>
<i> S2 : T-U-A-N,Tuan.</i>



T.asks Ss to work in pairs.
T. gives the feedback/comment.


<b>3.Further Practice: Sing the song of the ABC</b>
T.models or asks Ss to listen to the tape with the
song in the whole class .


T.can call some ss to come in front of the class
and present the song.


T.gives the comment.


Work in group to guess the leters of the
words


Coppy down


* Example exchange:
S1: What is your name?
S2:(Gives the real name)
S1: How do you spell it?
S2:(Gives the real name)


Listen to the tape


<b>IV.Consolidation: ( Involved )</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize the alphabet to spell the name.


- Revise how to ask and answer about the name.
- Exercise 3 P.12 (in workbook)


- Prepare Unit 2 : At school Section C 1- P26- 27 <i>( Y/ N questions)</i>


Date: 6.9.2009


Period : 10<i><b> </b></i><b> </b>

<b> UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 4: C 1 P. 26 – 27</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b><i>By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to know how to use : This, that in</i>
<i>positive and yes/ No questions.</i>


<b> I.Knowledge:This/That positive statements and Y/N questions to talk about people and</b>
things at school.


<b>II.Skills: Speaking</b>
B.Procedure:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b> II.Checking: </b>


<i> - What is your name? - I am …..</i>
<i> - How do you spell it?</i> …..


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’sactivities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<b>1.Warm up: * Jumbled words:</b>



VEEINGN =… TREEST =…
LLEHO =… YICT =…
NDSTAPU=… TEETHIRN =…
MNAE =…


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in groups rearrange
the letters for good words.


T. asks some Ss to stand up and read alound the
words,then gives the feedback.


* Answer:


EVENING STREET
HELLO CITY


STAND UP THIRTEEN
NAME


<b>2.Presentation:</b>
a.Pre- teach:


<b> - student ( n ) : (example)</b>
- teacher ( n ) : (example)
- school ( n ) : (example)
- class ( n ) : (example)
- desk ( n ) : (realia)


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.


Check vocab: * Matching:


a student (n)
a teacher (n)
a school (n)
a class (n)
a desk (n)


*Word cue drill: Practice vocabulary and revise


<i><b>“How do you spell it?”</b></i>


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


Ss copy into the notebook.


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<b>Teacher’sactivities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
Hoc sinh Giáo viên




Bàn học trường


* Example Exchange:



<i> S1:What is this in Eng Lish?</i>
<i> S2: (A student)</i>


<i> S1: How do you spell it?</i>
<i> S2: (s-t-u-d-e-n-t)</i>


* Presentation : C 1 P . 26 - 27


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape or T’s model.
*Model sentences:


This is my desk. Is this your class?
That is my school. Is that your teacher ?


Yes,it is./No,it isn’t.
T. elicits models choral ind.
T.does the concept check.


Form: <i><b>Is/ Are + S + O?- Yes,it is./No,it isn’t.</b></i>


NB: <i><b>my</b></i> ( + ) is changed into <i><b>your</b></i> (- )
<b>3.Practice: * Picture drill: </b>
T. uses pictures from P.26- 27


T. runs through and models.


*Example Exchange:
S1 : Is this your class?
S2 : No, it isn’t.



T. asks Ss to work in pairs with the rests.


T. calls some Ss to stand up and practice in
front of the class then gives the feedback.


<b>3.Further Practce: * Realia Drill:</b>


T points to real things in and around the
classrom


* Example exchange:
S1 : Is this your desk?
<b> S2 : Yes, it is./No,it isn’</b><i>t.</i>


Ss work in open,then closed pairs.


Ss answer and listen to T.Ss repeat
chorally and then ind.


Ss answer T’ questions and then copy
down into the notebook.


Ss draw the form.


Ss work in pairs.


Ss work in pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P .15</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vovab.


- Revise the form of Y/N questions.


- Complete exercise 2 P .15 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 2 : At School Section C 2- 4 P.28 – 29


<i> ( “What is this/that?- It’s….” to talk about things in the classroom)</i>


Date: 10.9.2009


Period : 11

<b> UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL</b>


<i> Lesson 6: C 2 – 4 P. 28-29</i>



<b>A.Objectives:By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk</b>
about things in the classroom.


<b> I.Knowledge: </b>“What is this?/ that” “It is a/ an….”


<b> II.Skills: Speaking</b>
<b>B.procedure:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 2 P. 15 (Yes / No questions )</b>
<b> III.New Lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’sactivities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>



<b>1.Presentation:</b>
* Dialogue Build:


T. uses this dialogue to elicit and practice
spelling vocab.


<i>Class : What’s this ? </i>


T : <i>It’s a door.</i>


Class : <i>How do you spell it ?</i>


T : <i>D-O-O-R, Door.</i>


* Picture Drill to Pre-Teach Vocabulary:
C 2 P .28


<i> - door - window</i>
<i> - board - clock</i>
<i> - waste basket - school bag</i>
<i> - pencil - pen</i>


<i> - ruler - eraser</i>


* Check vocab : R .O . R


* Model Sentence:
S1 : What is this ?



S2 : It is a book / pen / door.
an eraser.


* <i>Form</i> : - What is this ?-It is a/an…..


Ss work in the whole class for the dialogue
build.


Ss do the same for the rest of words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>Teacher’sactivities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
T. elicits models choral ind.


T.does the concept check.


<i>(Ask and answer about a thing in the room)</i>


<b>2.Practice:*ACTIVITIES 1: Wordsquare*</b>
T. asks Ss to work ind.,then share in pairs
andin groups.T.gives the possible answers.
* ACTIVITIES 2: Picture Cue Drill : C2 P.
28


* Example Exchange:
S 1 : What is this ?
S 2: It is a door.
T. asks Ss to work in pairs.


<b>3.Further Practice: Lucky Numbers</b>



<i>1.How do you spell “DESK”?</i>


<i>2.How do you spell “CLASSROOM”?</i>
<i>3.LN</i>


<i>4.How do you spell “CLOCK”?</i>
<i>5.How do you spell “PENCIL”?</i>
<i>6.How do you spell “RULER”?</i>
<i>7.LN</i>


<i>8.How do you spell “ERASER”?</i>
<i>9.LN</i>


<i>10.How do you spell “WINDOW”?</i>


T.explaits and then asks Ss to work in 2
teams for the game.


T. gives the feedback/comment.


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in groups.


Ss work in pairs.


Ss work in 2 teams with the game.


<b>IV.Consolidation:Exercise 3 P.15- 16</b>


<i>Example</i>: What is this?- It is a door.
<b>V.Homework:</b>



<b> - Memorize vocaband revise how to use “What’s this?-It’s a/an..”</b>


- Complete exercise 3 P. 15- 16.


- Prepare Unit 3 : At home section A1- 2 P. 30 – 31.


<i> (Wh-questions with These/Those and livingroom vocab to talk about things in the house)</i>


Date : 15.9.2009


Period: 12<i> </i>

<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i> Lesson 1: A 1- 2 P. 30 - 31</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>I.Knowledge:Wh-Questions with This/That/These/Those and living room </b>
vocabulary


<b> II.Skills:Speaking</b>
B.procedure:


<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 3 P. 15- 16</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation:</b>
*Pre teach:



- lamp ( n ): - bookshelf( n ):
- chair( n ): - couch( n ):
- armchair( n ): - table( n ):
- television( n ): - stool( n ):
- stereo( n ):


T. elicits models choral individual T.
reports on the board checks stress meaning.
* Checking: R O R


<b>2.Vocabulary Practice:</b>


+Slap the board / What and where:


<i> a lamp a T.V a stool</i>




<i> a chair a couch an armchair </i>


<b>3.Presentation:</b>


*Presentation text: A2 P.31


*Model sentences:
What are these?/those?
They are tables.


<i>Form:</i> What are these?/those?


They are + N(plural)


Use: <i>asking and answering about things in the</i>
<i>house in comparision with a thing. </i>


<b>4.Practice: *Picture drill: A 2 P . 31</b>
T.models.


* Example Exchange:


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally
ind. answer copy down into the
notebook.


S work in 2 groups.


Ss listen to the text.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
S1:What is this?


S2: It is a….


S1:What are those?
S2:They are …


T.ask Ss to work in open then closed pairs.


Ss work in pairs.



<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.18+19</b>


<i> * Example: a</i>) – What is this ?
It is a desk.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise how to use “What are these/those?-They are…..”
- Comp,ete exercise 2 P.18 + 19 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 3 : At home section A 3-4 P.32-34


<i> (Possessive pronouns to talk about family members)</i>


<b> </b>


Date: 16.9.2009


Period : 13

<b>UNIT 2: AT HOME</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 2: A 3-4</i>



A.Objectives:<i>By the end of this lesson, Ss are able to talk about family member</i>s.


<b> I.Knowledge:Family vocab, possessive pronouns and “Who’s this?”to talk about the</b>
family members.


<b> II.Skill: Speaking</b>
<b>B.procedure:</b>



<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 2 P. 18-19</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


Pre-Teach:
my


his family/father/mother/brother/sister
her


your


* Presentation Text: A3 P. 32
* Grid : <i>Ba’s family</i>


T. asks Ss to read the text andfill in the grid
with information about the family ind ,then
share in pairs and in groups.


<i>Tên</i> <i>Quan hệ</i> <i>Tuổi Nghề nghiệp</i>


Ba
Nga


Dialogue Build:


S1: Who’s that?
S2: It’s his mother.


S1: What’s her name?
S2:Her name’s Nga.
T. elicits and models


T. asks Ss to repeat chorally, then ind
T. rub the words of the dialogue and then
asks Ss to recall them.


T.asks Ss to work in open closed pairs.
<b>2.Practice: Word Cue Drill</b>


<i> Nga Ha Lan</i>
<i> ( 35 ) ( 40 ) ( 15 )</i>


<b> Example Exchange:</b>


<i> </i>S1: Who is that ?


S2: That’s his ( mother).
S1: What’s her name?
S2: She is Nga.


T. models and then asks Ss to work in pairs.
<b>3.Production: Describe and Draw*</b>


T. Ss to draw their family.In pairs,they
practice asking and answering about the
family members.


Ss answer listen to T. repeat chorally ind.


answer copy down into the notebook.


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in groups
read the passage and fill in the table with
suitable information.


Ss work in the whole class for the dialogue.


Ss work in pairs .


Ss work ind.,then in pairs asking and
answering the question about the family
mrmbers.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 4 P. 20-21(in work book)</b>
Example: a)<i><b> Ba / 11</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

His name is Ba.
- How old is he?


He’s eleven years old.


<b>- T. asks Ss to work in ind.,then in pairs and in groups.</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


<b> - Memorize vocab</b>


- Complete Exercise 4 p20-21 into the notebook.


- Get students to prepare dice for tomorrow: “ Snake and ladder”(P 35)



- Prepare Unit 3 : At Home section B1-2 P. 35-36.


<i> (number 21-100 and pronounciation of plural nouns)</i>


Date: 18.9.2009


Period: 14

<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>



<i> Lesson 3: B 1- 2 P.35- 36</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to count from 21 to 100 and how to read plural
noun (s/z/iz)


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Numbers 21-100 and pronunciation of plural nouns(/s/, /z/, /iz/ to count things in the
classroom


<b>I.Skill:Speaking</b>
B procedure:


<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Revision: *Board drill:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’s activities</b>



<b>1.Presentation:</b>


+Pre teach: Use the card to present voabulary
Thirty:30


Forty: 40
Fifty: 50
Sixty:60
Seventy: 70
Eight:80
Ninety: 90


One hundred: 100


*Check vocab:What and where:


80 100 65 51 44 77 32
<b>3.Practice:</b>


<i>Activit 1</i>: Snakes and ladder: B1 P.35


T. asks Ss to work with the numbers from 1 to
100.


<i>ACTIVITIES 2</i>: * Realia: B2 P.36
T.models.


Example:



S1: There one door


S2: And there are 22 desks
T.asks Ss to work in pairs.


<b>4.Further practice: *Dictation lists:</b>


T reads: Desk, rulers, benches, students, tables,
books, clocks, couches, door, windows, houses,
lamps.


Answer:


Students write:


/s/ /z/ /<i>iz</i>/


<i>desks rulers benches</i>
<i>students tables couches</i>
<i>books doors houses</i>
<i>clocks windows</i>


<i>lamps</i>


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model - repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress - meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss work in groups.



Ss work with the whole class.


Ss work in pairs.


Ss work ind.and then shre in pairs and in
groups.


<b>IV.Consolidation: * Exercise 2/21</b>


T. asks Ss to write the plurals of the words.
* Ex: window - windows


<b>V.Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

- Prepare Unit 3 : At home (B3-5P.36-37)


<i>( Talking about things in the livingroom)</i>


Date : 22.9.2009


Period: 15

<b> UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 4: B 3- 5P.36-37</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to get to know the questions”How many...are
there? “to talk about things in the classroom, the living room and the family


<b>I.Knowledge:”How many…?”questions,livingroom , classroom and the family</b>
vocab



<b> II.Skill:Speaking</b>
B.PROCEDURE:


<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Revision: *Chain game: B2 P.36</b>


Example: S1: There is one door


S2: There are one door and six windows
S3:...


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation:</b>


*Presentation Text: B3 P.37


Present the text by t reads to model and give the
structures and give the new structure


*Model sentences:


How many doors are there ?
desks


benches



There is one./There are two.


<i>*Form</i>:How many+plural noun+ are there…..?
There is one./There are …..


<b>2.Practice:*Picture drill:</b>
B2 P.36 and B5 P.37


Example exchange: <i>(from the picture on P.36)</i>


S1: How many desks are there ?
S2: There are six.


<b>3.Production:</b>


<i>ACTIVITIES 1</i>:Kim’s game: picture P.31


<i>ACTIVITIES2</i>:Survey:


T.asks Ss to copy the survey on the board and
make questions and answers and then fill in the


Ss work in individially


Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
ind.,then copy down into the notebook.


Ss work in open then closed pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


table in groups.


*Example Exchange:


S1:How many people are there in your family?
S2: There are ..


Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 with the
game.


Name In your family? In your house? In your classroom?
people chairs lamps tables desks windows students


<i>Nam</i> <i>3</i>


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 3/ 25 (workbook)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise “How many…..?” question.
- Complete Ex 3/25 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 3 : At home ( C 1- 2 /38 +39 )


<i> (Talking about jobs)</i>


Date : 24.9. 2009


Period :16

<b> UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 5: C 1-2 P.38-39</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text about family to unerstand the
details and to talk about jobs.


<b> I.Knowledge: talking about jobs</b>
<b> II.Skills:Reading</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 3/ 25 (workbook) </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<b>1.Pre reading:</b>
+Pre teach:


engineer(picture):
doctor (picture):


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
nurse (picture):


+Checking: Net works


<i>Jobs</i>





<i>a doctor a teacher</i>


+Open prediction:


<i><b>Lan</b><b>’ </b><b><sub>s family</sub></b></i>


<i>How old?</i> <i>What does s/he do?</i>
<i>Father</i>


<i>Mother</i>
<i>Brother</i>
<i>Lan</i>


<b>2.While reading</b>


ACTIVITIES1:T.asks students to read C1 P.38
to check their predictions


<i><b>Lan</b><b>’ </b><b><sub>s family</sub></b></i>


<i>How old?</i> <i>What does s/he do?</i>


<i>Father</i> 40 engineer


<i>Mother</i> 35 teacher


<i>Brother</i> 8 student


<i>Lan</i> student



ACTIVITIES 2:<i>Noughts and crosses:</i>


T asks questions from “a “ to “h” in C1 P.38
Question i:


<i> How many books are there in Lan’s lliving</i>
<i>room?</i>


<i><b>a</b></i> <i><b>g</b></i> <i><b>c</b></i>


<i><b>h</b></i> <i><b>b</b></i> <i><b>e</b></i>


<i><b>i</b></i> <i><b>f</b></i> <i><b>d</b></i>


T. asks Ss to work in 2 teams.


<b>3.Post reading:*</b><i>Word cue drill</i>: C2 P.39


T asks Ss to talk about Song’s family ind , then
in pairs.


*<i>Transformation writing</i>*


T.asks Ss to transform the sentences in C1.P.38


Ss work in individially.


Ss work in groups to guess about Lan’s
family:



How old...?


What does he/ she do?


Read C1 P.38 to check their predictions


Ss work in groups to ask and anwer the
questions in the section C1 P.38


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
with the information in C2P.39 to write about


Song|<sub>s family</sub>


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 1/23</b>


- T asks Ss to write the sentences about jobs.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Read the text again for details and answer the questions.
- Revise how to ask and answer about jobs.


- Complete Ex 1/23 into the notebook.
- Do Ex 5/26 (workbook)


- Prepare Grammar Practice


Date: 2.10.2009



Period :17

<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>



<i> Lesson 6: Grammar Practice P.40-43</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


<i>By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to further practice in some studied knwoledge.</i>


<b>I.Knowledge:“To Be” , Imprative, Numbers,Question words, There is/There are,and</b>
funiture vocabulary


<b> II.Skills:Speaking</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking: within the duration of the lesson</b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Studentts’activities</b>


<b>1.TO BE:</b>


<b>*</b><i>Gap fill</i>: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40
Noughts and Crosses:


<i>They/teache We/students She/a nurse </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Studentts’activities</b>


<i>r</i>



<i>He/engineer I/student </i> <i>They/sisters</i>


<i>You/12</i> <i>We/brother</i>


<i>s</i>


<i>She/doctors</i>


Example Exchange: They are teachers
T.asks Ss to work in 2 teams with the games.
<b>2.IMPERATIVE:</b>


<b>*</b><i>G ap fill</i>:Grammar practice 4 P.40:Simon says
<b>3.Question words:</b>


*<i>Gap fill</i>: Grammar practice 6 P.41
*<i>Answer given</i>:


<i>Song’s a student and he is 12. There are 4 people</i>
<i>in Song’s family : his farther, his mother, his sister</i>
<i>and him. His farther is name is Kien.He is 42 and he</i>


<i>is a doctor. His mother|<sub>s name is Oanh. she is 39</sub></i>


<i>years old and she is a nurse. His siter’s name is Lan.</i>


<i>She is 15 and she is a student</i>.


T asks Ss to make questions for the answer given


ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


<i>a.12 b.4 c.Kien d.42 e.a doctor</i>
<i>f.Oanh g.39 h.a nurse i.Lan J.a student</i>


*Anwers Key:


1.How old is Song?


2.How many poeple are there in his family?
3.What is his farther’s name?


4.What does he do?


5.What is his mother’s name?
6.How old is she?


7.what does do?


8.Whatis his sister|<sub>s name?</sub>


9.What does she do?


<b>4.NUMBERS:</b>


<i>Bingo</i>: T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven, one
hundred, thirty, sixteen, forty, fourteen, three,
nineteen...


<b>5.Furniture:</b>



*<i>Crossword Puzzle</i>: Grammar practice 10 P.43
*<i>Guessing game</i>:


T asks Ss to draw their own pictures of furniture
on a scrap of poster.


*Example exchange:


S1: Is it a TV? S1:Is it a chair?
S2: No, it is not. S2: Yes, it is.


Ss work with the whole class.


Ss work in individially ,then share in
pairs and in groups.


T- whole class


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs and
groups.


Ss choose 9 numbers and the decimals
And work with the whole class with the
game.


Ss work in groups


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
drawing their own pictures of furniture


on scrap of paper and ask following the
example exchange.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Studentts’activities</b>
*<i>T/F repetition drill</i>: picture B5 P.37


There is a TV
There are 3 stools
There are 4 people


There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs
There are 7 books


There are 2 lamps
There is a lamp


There is a steeo and a telephone.


<i>(Repeat) </i>
<i>(Repeat)</i>
<i>(Silent)</i>
<i>(Silent)</i>
<i>(Repeat) </i>
<i>(Repeat)</i>


<b>IV.Consolidation: </b><i>(involved)</i>


<b>V.Homework: </b>


<b> - Revise all studied points for One-Period Test.</b>


Date:4.10.2009


Period: 18

<b>ONE-PERIOD TEST</b>



<i>I.Chọn a,b,c hoặc d để hoàn thành những câu sau:</i>


1. He……..twelve years old.


<i>a. is b. are c. am d. be</i>


2……is that? – It is a waste basket.


<i>a. Whob. Whatc. Whered. How</i>


3.My father and mother…….teachers.


<i>a. isb. arec. amd. be</i>


4.What’s your name? - …..name is Bao.


<i>a. hisb. myc. herc. the</i>


5. <i><b>10 + 5</b></i> =……


<i>a. ten b. fiveteenc. fiftyd. fifteen</i>


6.What does he do?


<i> a. He is an doctor.b. He is a doctor.c. He is doctor.d. He is doctors.</i>



7.What is her name? -……..is Thu.


<i>a. Ib. Hec. Shed. Her</i>


8……you spell your name? – That L-A-N,Lan.


<i>a. Whob. Whatc. Whered. How</i>


<i>II.Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn chỉnh:</i>


1. ten / He / is /old / years.


………..
2. classroom / is / that / your ?


………..
3. Ly Thuong Kiet / I / on / live /street.


………..
4. This / not / my / is / book .


………..


<i>III. Điền từ thích hợp vào chổ trống:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

Hi.I am Lan. I am a...And these...my brother and sister.They are …….. ... My
brother is twenty-five…………old.My…..….…is twenty-nine years old.There are four
people……..my family.We are in the livingroom.


<i>IV.Trả lời các câu hỏi sau:</i>



1.What’s your name?


………..
2.where do you live?


………..
Date:5.10.2009


Period : 19

<b>TEST-CORRECTION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be corrected their testing </b>
papers.


I.Knowledge: Tested points
II. Skills: Speaking


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


I.Settlement: Greeting and checking the attendance
<b> II.15-minute test:</b>


* Choose a,b,c or d to complete the following sentences:


1.Is Thu’s school small?


a. Yes,it is.b. Yes,they are.c. No,it isn’t.d. No,it is.


2……….students are there in the classroom?-There are forty.
a. How manyb. How c. Whe re d. Who



3.What does Miss Hoa do?-She is……teacher.
a. ab. an c. thed. one


4.I…..Hoa and……is Lan.


a. am/herb. is/shec.am/hed. am/she


5.Which grade are you in?- I am……grade 6.
a. inb. onc. atd. to


6.Thu’s bags……..small.
a. isb. arec. bec. am


7.Is your school in the country?


a. Yes,it is.b. Yes, I am.c. No,it isn’t.d. No,it is.
8.Are Bim’s clocks big?


a. Yes,it is.b. No,it isn’t.c. Yes,they are.d. No,they are.
9. I live……Vietnam.


a. inb. onc. atd. to


10.My school is small and it is…..the country.
a. inb. onc. atd. to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<i>I.Chọn a,b,c hoặc d để hoàn thành những </i>


<i>câu sau:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers for the
questions and reasons for the choices,then
gives the feedback.


* Answer:
1. a- is 5.d-fifteen


2. b-What 6-b He’s a doctor.
3. b-are 7-c She


4. b-my 8-d-How


<i>II.Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn </i>
<i>chỉnh:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers from
Ss and then gives the feedback.


* Answer:
1.He’s ten years old.


2.Is that your classroom?


3.I live on Ly Thuong Kiet street.
4.This is not my book.


<i>III. Điền từ thích hợp vào chổ trống:</i>
T. runs through the passage and ask Ss to


fill in the gaps with suitable given words and
reasons for the choices ind.,then in pairs and
in groups,then gives the feedback.


* Answer:


1.student 4.years
2.are 5.sister


3.students 6.in


Ss read the multiple choices again and then
give the answers and the reasons for their
choices.


Ss read the given words again and then read
alound their sentences.


Ss read the passage again and then fill in the
gaps with suitable given words to complete
the passage.


<b>IV. Mark reporting: </b>


* T.asks Ss to read their marks again and Ss report into the mark-book.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise the studied points.


- Prepare Unit 4 : Big or Small? (A1- 2 P 44)



<i>( Yes/No questions and possive “s” )</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

Period:20

<b> UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 1: A 1-2 P.44</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a desciption of a school with practice in
possessive “s” to talk about possessions.


<b> I.Knowledge:Yes/ No questions and Possessive “s”</b>
<b> II.Skills:Reading</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
II.Checking: (No checking)


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<b>1.Pre-reading: *Pelmanism:</b>


<i> I Thu He You She</i>


<b> </b>


<i> His My Your Her Thu’s</i>



Pre Teach:


big (adj): (realia)
small (adj): (realia)
in the city (Picture):
in the country: (Picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


*Check vocab: ROR


b.Predict: * Matching


<i> big</i> Phong’s school <i>small</i>




<i>in the city</i> Thu’s school <i> in the city</i>


<b>2.While- reading:</b>


<i>ACTIVITIES 1</i>: Read and check


T.asks Ss to read the text and correct their
predictions


<i>ACTIVITIES 2</i>:Comprehension question:
A2 P.44 a-d



<i>Answer</i> a. Yes,it is.
b. No,it isn’t.


Ss work in groups.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model - repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress - meaning and
copy into the notebook.


T- whole class (to predict )


Ss work in groups.


Ss read the text and check their
preditions.


Ss work in groups(Answer the questions
in A2 P.44 from a to d .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
c.It’s in the country.


d.It’s in the city.
<b> 3.Post – reading:</b>


*Model sentences:
S1:Is Phong’s school small?
S2:Yes, it is.



S1:Is Thu’s school small?
S2:No, it isn’t


Yes/ No questions answer drill:
Phong’s school


Thu’s school


Your school <i> big/ small?</i>


Your brother’s school <i>in the city/ country?</i>


Your sister’s school


* Example Exchange:
S1: Is Phong’s school small?
S2:No,it isn’t.


S1: Is it in the country?
S2: Yes,it is.


T. asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs.


Ss work in groups.


Ss work in open-cloesd pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation: </b><i>(involved)</i>
<b>V.Homework:</b>



- Read the text again, mormorize vocab and answer the questions.
- Revise possessive”s” and Yes/No questions.


- Prepare Uint 4: Big or small? (A3-5)
Date : 20.10.2009


Period : 21

<b>UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 2: A 3 – 5 P.45.46</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read text about school to understand
details and get further practice in numbers and vocabulary.


<b>I.Knowledge:Numbers and school vocabulary</b>
<b> II.Skill: Reading</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.1.Revision: *Bingo:</b>


T.elicits and lists numbers on the board:2, 5, 8,100, 200,400,32,54,600, 900, 10
T. chooses and reads: 200, 5, 8,32,54,900 and then asks Ss to work ind. with the game.
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Pre-reading: * Open prediction:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
about , to do with school:


<b>400, 900,8, 20</b>


Example: students, teachers, desks, windows...
<b>2.While-reading:</b>


<i>ACTIVITIES 1</i>: Read and check


T asks Ss to read the text A 3 P.45 to correct
their prediction ind.,then in pairs and in groups
T asks Ss to correct their predictions as well.


<i>ACTIVITIES 2: </i>Answer given


<i> 1. In the country</i>
<i> 2. 8</i>


<i> 3. 400</i>


<i> 4. In the city</i>


<i> 5. No, it is not. It is big</i>
<i> 6. 20</i>


<i> 7. 900</i>


T. asks Ss to make questions for the answers



<i>ACTIVITIES 3 *: </i>Answer the questions:


T.asks Ss to read the text again and anser the
questions in pairs.


*Answer key:


<i>1.Where is Phong’s school?</i>


<i>2.How many classrooms are there in Phong’s</i>
<i>school?</i>


<i>3. How many students are there in Phuong’s</i>
<i>school?</i>


<i>4.Where is Thu’s school?</i>
<i>5.Is it small?</i>


<i>6.How many classrooms are there in Thu’s</i>
<i>school?</i>


<i>7.How many students are there in Thu’s school?</i>


<b>3.Post-reading:* A 4 P.46</b>
* <i>Transformation writing</i>:


Depending on whether Ss live in the city or the
country, T. asks Ss to take on of the texts in
A3P.45 and rewrite it according to their own
school by ansering the questions.



<i>Ex</i>: My school is in the country.It’s…..


and predict the given numbers are about.


Ind., then in pairs and in groups,Ss read
the text and check their predictions and
then correct the false ones as well.


In pairs,Ss read the text and answer the
questions.


Ss read the text again for details and
make questions for the given answers
ind., then share in pairs and in groups.


Ss work in individially rewriting the text
according to their school.


<b>IV.Consolidation: </b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


<b>-Read the text again and memorize vocab.</b>
<b>-Prepare Unit 4: big or small? B1-5 P. 47- 48</b>
<b>-Exercise 5 P.38 ( in text book)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

Date: 24.10.2009


Period : 22

<b>Unit 4: BIG OR SMALL?</b>




<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 3: B 1-5 P.47.48</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to listen to a dialogue about school to
understand the details; practising cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” question
to talk about school.


<b> I.Knowledge: 1.Which class are you in ?-I am in class….</b>
2.Which grade are you in ?-I am in grade….
3.Cardinal numbers and Ordinal numbers
II.Skills: Listening


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: </b>
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Pre listening:</b>
a.Pre teach:


and: (translation) :
the first floor: (picture):
the sixth floor: (picture):
b. Rub Out and Remember:
the first= 1st


the second=2nd



the third= 3rd


the fourth= 4th


the fifth= 5th


the sixth= 6th


the seventh= 7th


the eighth= 8th


the nineth= 9th


the tenth= 10th


c. Predict dialogue:


<i>Thu:</i> Hello, which grade are you in?


<i>Phong:</i>Iam in grade...


<i>Thu: </i>And which class are you in?


<i>Phong:</i>...What about you?


<i>Thu:</i> I am in grade...,class...


How many floors does your school have?



<i>Phong:</i>...It is asmall school.


<i>Thu: </i>My school has...floors and my
classroom is on the…...floor. Where is your
classroom?


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down
Work in group


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>Phong:</i> It is on the...floor.


T.runs though and asks Ss to work in 2 teams
and predict the missing information.


<b>2.While listening:</b>


<i>ACTIVITIES 1</i>: Read and check


T. asks Ss to listen the text B1 P.47and correct
their predictions


<i>ACTIVITIES 2:</i> Grid: B2 P.48


T. asks Ss to read the text again and complete


the table ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


<b>4.Post listening: * Board drill:</b>


Grade Class Floor


<b>THU</b>
<b>PHONG</b>


<b>YOU</b>


Example Exchange:


S1: Which grade/class is Thu in?
S2:She is in grade 6/ 6A


S1:Where is her classroom?


S2:It is on the first floor.
T. asks Ss to work in pairs.


Ss work in pairs asking nad answering
the questions using the information
given the table.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 1 P.38 (in workbook)</b>


* T asks Ss to complete the dialogue with suitable words or phrases.
Example: A – Which grade are you in?



<b>V.Homework:</b>
- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text and anser the question.
- complete Ex 1P38 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 4: Big or small? C 1-3 P.48- 49 <i>(Simple Present Tense with “I”)</i>


Date:26.10.2009


Period : 23

<b>Unit 4: BIG OR SMALL?</b>



<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 4:C 1-3 -P.49</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to get to talk about habitual</b>
actions


<b> I.Knowledge:Simple Present Tense, and vocabulary of routines</b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


Pre teach: T. uses the pictures on P.49
(to) get up:


(to) get dressed:
(to) brush your teeth:


(to) wash your face:
(to) have breakfast:
(to) go to school:


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


*Check vocab : Slap the board
Presentation Text: C1.P.49


T.asks Ss to isten to the habitual actions.
Model Sentences:


- What do you do every morning?
get up.


I brush my teeth
have breakfast
go to school.
- What does Ba do every morning?
gets up.


He brushes his teeth
has breakfast
goes to school.


T.elicits-models-choral-ind.copeies on the
boarband does the concept check.



Form: S + V/Vs/es + O


<i> (Talkng about the habitual actions)</i>


<b>2.Practice:Word Cue Drill:</b>
a. Ba/get up


b. He / get dressed
c. Ha/brush her teeth
d. I / wash my face
c. I/ have breakfast
d.They / go to school


*Example Sentence:


S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I get up


S2:What does Ba do in the morning?
S1: He gets up.


T.asks Ss to work in pairs for the rests.
<b>3.Production:</b>


Write It Up: C 3 P 49*


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model - repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress - meaning and
copy into the notebook.



Ss work in 2 groups.
Ss listen to the tape.


Ss answer and listen then repeat in
chorus and individially


Copy down


Ss draw the form of the Simplr Present
tense.


Ss listen to T.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T asks Ss to write 5 sentences about what You


do every morning.


Ex: Every morning,I get up.Then I ...


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in groups
writing about the habitual actions.


<b>IV.Consolidation: ( involved)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise Simple present tense.
- Memorize vocab.



- Prepare Unit 4 : Big or Small ( C4 – 7 P.52- 53 )


<i>( Telling about the time)</i>


Date: 28.10.2009


Period : 24

<b> Unit 4: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<i> Lesson 5:C 4-7 -P.50-51</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to tell the time.</b>
<b>I.Knowledge: How to tell the time</b>


<b> II.Skills: Speaking</b>
B.PROCEDURE:


<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: a, I (get)……….up.</b>


b, He (go)….to school.


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation:</b>
a.Number dictation:*


T reads: one ten, fourty thirty, five twenty, three
fifteen, six forty, seven forty five, ten thrirty,
twelve twenty five, eleven fifty, two fifty five


b.Pre teach:


the time :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

(ten) o’clock :
half past (ten) :
(to) be late for:


Ex: We are late for school.
*Check vocab: What and Where
T.asks Ss to listen to the time.
*Model sentenses:
S1 : What time is it?
S2 : It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.
half past ten.


<i>Form</i>: What time is it?
It’s + ...o’clock.
<b> hour + minute</b>


<b> minute + </b><i>past/to</i> + hour
<b>2.Practice: </b>


ACTIVITIES 1: Picture/Realia drill:
* Example Exchange:


S1 : What time is it?
S2 : It is eight oclock.



T.asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs.
Word cue drill : C7 P.51


a. get up / 6.00


b. go to school / 12.30
c. have breakfast / 11.00
d. go home / 4.30


* Example Exchange:
S1 : What time do you get up?
S2 : I get up at six o’clock.
T. asks Ss to work in pairs.


<b> </b>


<i>6.10</i> <i>6.30</i> <i>6.45</i>


<i> 7.00</i> <i>11.30</i> <i>3.15</i>


<i>3.15</i> <i>4.20</i> <i>5.30</i>


T.asks Ss work in 2 groups asking and
answering the time.


Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individially and copy down .


Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individially and then copy into the


notebook.


Ss work in open-closed pairs practicing
telling the time.


Ss work in open-closed pairs practicing
talking about the habitual actions and
the time.


Ss work in groups to ask and answer the
questions the time using the cues.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Evercise 3 P.41 (in workbook)
- Memorize vocab.


- Revise how to tell the time.
- Prepare Unit 5 : A 1-2 P.52-53


<i>(Simple Present Tense with “I“ vs.” He/ She” )</i>


Date:29.10.2009


Period : 25

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 1: A 1-2 P.52-53</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to to talk about daily routines.</b>
<b>I.Knowledge: </b><i>Simple Present Tense with “I“ vs.” He/ She” </i>



<b> II.Skills: Speaking</b>
<b>c.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Telling the time</b>


<i>a.</i> 5.00 <i>( It’s five o’clock.) </i>


<i>b.</i> 7.45 <i>( It’s seven fỏty-five./It’s a quarter to eight.)</i>


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation:</b>
a.Pre teach:


(to) do your homework:
(to) play games:


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


*Check vocab: Slap the board:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
b.Presentation Text: A1 P.52


* Model sentences:



Every day I go to school.
She goes


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the board and does the
concept check.


<i> ( Talking about the daily routines)</i>


c.Comprehension questions: A2 P.53 a) – d)
T.runs through-models-asks Ss to work in pairs
for the rests.


* Answer:


a.Every day Nga gets up at 6
b.She brushes her teeth
c.She washes her face


<b>2.Practice: *Substitution Drill:</b>


<i>Teacher :</i>


Every day,I get up at six.
I brush my teeth.


I wash my face.
I get dressed.
I have breakfast.


I go to school.
I play games.


I do my homework.
<b>3.Production: </b>
<b>* Survey:</b>


<i>name get up breakfast games</i> <i>homework</i>


Hoa 5.30


* Example Exchange:


S1 : What time do you get up?
S2 : 5.30


T.asks Ss to work in groups of five or six.
* Write-it-up: <i>or orrally report back:</i>


<i>Every morning,Hoa gets up at five-thirty.He…</i>


Ss aswer-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.- in chorus,then answer and copy
into the notebook.


Ss work in open-closed pairs.


<i>Students</i>:


Every day,Nga gets up at six.


She brushes her teeth.


She washes her face.
She gets dressed.
………..




Ss to work in groups asking and
answering the questions filling in the
table.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 * P.44 ( Choose the correct vreb form)</b>
* Example: a) goes


* T asks Ss to work ind-share in pairs and then in groups.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

- Memorize vocab.


- Complete exercise 2 P.44 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 5: Things I do. (section A3-4 P.53-54)


<i> (Simple Present Tense – “ WH “ questions with He/She )</i>


Date:2.11.2009


Period :26

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 2: A3-4 -P. 53-54</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to use the simple present tense and “Wh
questions” with “He/She” to talk about other people’s daily routines. (after school)
<b> I.Knowledge: </b><i>Simple Present Tense with “WH” questions</i>


II.Skills: Speaking
B.PROCEDURE:


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: * Supply the correct verb form: </b>


<i>a)</i> I (go)……to school every afternoon. <i>(go)</i>
<i>b)</i> He(get)……..up at 6 o’clock every day. <i>(gets)</i>


<b> </b> III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’<sub>activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation:</b>
a. Pre-Teach:


(to) listen to music: <i>(picture)</i>


(to) watch T.V: <i>(picture)</i>


(to) do the housework: <i>(picture)</i>


(to) read: <i> (picture)</i>



T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the board and does the
concept check.


*Check vocab: Matching
b.Ordering vocabulary:


T reads: <i>Every morning, Lan gets upand listen to</i>
<i>music. Every afternoon she comes home and does</i>
<i>the housework. Then she washes T.V . Every</i>
<i>evening, she reads and does her homework.</i>


<i> </i>*Answer:


1. Listen to music 3.Watch T.V
2.do the housework 4.Read


c.Presentation Text: A3 P.53
T.asks Ss to listen to the text.
*Model sentence:


S1:What does Ba do after school?


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model - repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress - meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ind.,Ss listen to T’s and reorder the
given vocab.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’<sub>activities</sub></b>


S2:He washes T.V.


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the board and does the
concept check.


<i>( Simple Present Tense to talk about after school</i>
<i>ACTIVITIES)</i>


d. Comprehension Questions: A4 P.54
T.asks Ss to work in pairs.


<b>2.Practice: Picture Drill: A3 P.53</b>
Example Exchange:


S1 : What does Ba do after school?
S2 : He watches T.V.


T.asks Ss to work in pairs.


<b>3.Further practice: Noughts and Crosses:</b>


He/games She/ teeth Lan/house work
Ba/ dressed Nam/school Thu/ homework
She/ face He/breakfast Mai/music
* Example Exchange:



S1: What does he do every morning?
S2: She gets dressed.


T.asks Ss to work in 2 teams with the game.


Ss aswer - listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.- in chorus,then answer and copy
into the notebook.


Ss work in pairs asking and answering
the questions.


Ss work in pairs asking and answering
the questions using the pictures in
textbook on page 53.


Ss work in two groups to ask and
answer the questions using the given


cues and “<i>Every</i>


<i>morning/afternoon/evening”</i>


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 3: P.44 in workbook(Write the senteneces using the pictures)</b>
Example: a) What does she do ?


She does her homework.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise Simple Present Tense with “Wh”-questions to talk about after school activities.


- Memorize vocab.


- Complete exercise 3 P.44 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 5: Things I do ( section A5-6 P.54-55)
<i>( Yes/No questions with ordinary verbs)</i>


Date:5.11.2009


Period : 27

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 3: A 5-6 -P. 54-55</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to get to know “ Yes/No</b>
questions” and short answers to talk about daily rountines.


<b> I.Knowledge: Yes/No questions and the short answers</b>
II.Skills: Speaking


<b>B.ROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking:Exercise 3 P.44 (Write the sentences using the pictures on page 53)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


a.Pre teach:


(to) play volleyball:



(to) play football (soccer):
(to) play sports:


a girl:


*Check vocab: R . O . R


b.Presentation Dialogue: A5 P.54
T.asks Ss to listen to the dialogue.
Model sentence:


Do you / they play football?
Does she / he


- Yes, I/ we/ they do
she/ he does
- No, I/ we/ they don’t.
she/ he doesn’t.


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T.reports on the board and does the
concept check.


Form: Do/Does + S + Vinf + ( O ) ?
- Yes,S+do/does.


- No,S+don’t/doesn’t.
Grid:



Ind.,then in pairs and in groups,T. asks Ss to read
the dialogue and make a grid about Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui,
girls with answer key(*)


Name Volleyball Football


<i>Nga</i> P


<i>Lan</i> P


<i>Thu</i> P


<i>Vui</i> P


<i>girls</i> (P)


<b>2.Practice:</b>


Yes/No Question Answer Drill : A 6 P.55 a) - g)
Example Exchange:


a, S1 : Do you play sports?
S2 : Yes, I do/ No, I don’t.
T.asks Ss to work in pairs.


<i>(The grid can also used as a drill)</i>


<b>3.Further practice: </b>
Find S.O Who:



Find someone who… Name


<i>…watches T.V</i>


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model - repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress - meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss listen to the tape.


Ss aswer-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer and copy ind.-into the
notebook.


Ss read the dialogue again .And then
work ind.,- in pairs - groups for
information filling in the table.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>…play football</i>


<i>…does the housework</i>
<i>…play volleyball</i>
<i>…listen to music</i>
<i>…reads</i>


Example Exchange:
S1: Do you watch T.V?


S2: Yes,I do.


S1: What’s your name?
S2: I’m…..


S1: How do you spell it?...etc.
T. asks Ss to work in groups of five or six.


Ss work in groups.


<b>VI.Consolidation: Excercise4 P.45(Write the questions)</b>


Example: a) They play volleyball. Do they play volleyball?
* T.asks Ss to work ind then share in pairs and in groups.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise Yes/No question with ordinary verbs.
- Complete Ex 4 P.45 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 5: things I do ( section B1-3 P.56-57)
Date:6.11.2009


Period : 28

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 4: B1-3 -P. 56-57</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a picture story about</b>
Ba’s daily rountine.


<b> I.Knowledge: routine vocabs and Simple Present tense</b>


II.Skills:Reading and speaking


<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Jumbled words:</b>


okhueowsr = housework ypal = play


tislen = listen cthaw = watch
ader = read vahe = have


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’sactivities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Revision: </b>
<b> 2.Pre- reading:</b>
Pre teach:


(to) take a shower: (picture)
(to) eat: (mine)
(to) start: (meaning)


(to) finish (antonym of start)
(to) have lunch (picture)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>Teacher’sactivities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
(to) go to bed (picture)



T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


*Checking: what and where


take a shower eat start
finish have lunch


go to bed


Open predition: B2 P.57 9 (in textbook)


Ind.-in pairs and in groups,T.aks Ss to fill
predict about Ba’s routines and fill in the the
table with the time in figures.


Action <sub>Ba</sub> Time <sub>me</sub>


get up 6.00


go to school
classes start
classes finish
have lunch
go home
go to bed


<b>3. While reading: </b>
<b> B1 My Routine P 56</b>



T.asks Ss to read the text to check their
predictions.(Grid)ind and then in pairs and in
groups.


<b>4.Post reading: Survey B 2-3 P 57</b>


T. asks Ss to complete the last column in the B2
table(about me) then do B3 a) and b) with a
partner.


Ss work in two groups.


Teacher- whole class


Work in groups


Read the text in individially
Work in pairs


Work in individially
Work in pairs


<b>IV.Consolidation:Exercise 3 P.49 (in workbook)</b>
Ex: Hoa gets up at six o’clock.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Complete Exercise 3 P.49 into the notebook.



- Memorize vocab and read the text again for details.
- Prepare Unit 5 : Things I do ( C 1 P58)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Date:10.11.2009


Period : 29

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i> </i>

<i>Lesson 5: C 1 P. 58</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the school</b>
subjects.


<b> I.Knowledge: “Have and Don’t have” to talk about the timetable </b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking,reading </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


Pre teach:


timetable ( n ) <i>(realia)</i>


English ( n ) <i>(translation)</i>


Math ( n ) <i> (realia)</i>


Literature ( n ) <i>(realia)</i>


History ( n ) <i>(realia)</i>



Geography( n ) <i>(realia)</i>


Monday ( n ) <i>(realia)</i>


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: Ordering vocab


T. reads: First we have literature. Then we
have Goegraphy . At 8 .40 we have English
and then we have math. At 10.15 we have
history . This is our timetable on Monday.
Presentation text: C1 P.58


T.asks Ss to listen to the text.
Model sentence:
S1:What do we have today?
S2:We have English.


I do not have timetable.
<b>2.Practice: Word cue drill: </b>


a.English/ 7.00 d.History/ 9.35
b.Geography/ 10.15 e.Literature/ 8.40
c.Math/ 8.00


T. runs through and models.


Example exchange:
S1: What do we have today?
S2: We have English.


S1: What time does it start?
S2: At 7.00


T. asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs.
<b>3.Further practice Mapped dialogue:</b>
 Nam  Ha


What...today? History
What time....start? 7.50


Do we...literature... 8.40 No, ...English
What time...finish... 9.25


What .... at 9.35? Geography
Do we....math? Yes, ...1015


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


*


Ss work ind then in pairs and in groups
ordering the read vocab.



Ss answer-repeat and then copy down into
the notebook.


Ss work in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T. runs through – elicits the questions and the


answers.Then models- pairwork.
Example Exchange:
Nam: What do we have today?
Ha: We have History.


Nam: What time does it start?
Ha: At seven fifty.


Nam: Do we have Literature at eight forty?
Ha:No, we don’t.We have English.


Nam: What time does it finish?
Ha: Nine twenty five.


……..


Ss answer-listen to T. And then work in
open-closed pairs.




<b>VI.Consolidation: (involved)</b>


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab and read the text again for details about the timetable.
- Revise “ Have/Don’t have” to talk about school subjects.


- Prepare Unit 5 : Things I do ( C 2-3 P.59)


<i> (days of the week vocab with “Have/Don’t have” to talk about the weekly timetable)</i>


Date:13.11.2009


Period : 30

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i>Lesson 6: C2-3 P. 59</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson,Ss will be able to talk about the days of the</b>
week vocab and weekly timetable.


<b> I.Knowledge: ”Has/ doesn’t have” to talk about days of the week and the timetable.</b>
II.Skills: Speaking and writing


<b>B.Procedure:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: * What do we have today?</b>


We have…….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>



Pre teach:
When?


Tuesday: <i> (realia)</i>


Wednesday: <i>(realia)</i>


Thursday: <i> (realia)</i>


Friday: <i> (realia)</i>


Saturday: <i>(realia)</i>


Sunday: <i> (realia)</i>


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: Matching:


Tuesday Thứ 7
Wednesday Thứ 6
Thursday Thứ5
Friday CN


Saturday Thứ 4
Sunday Thứ 3
Predict dialogue*



Nga: When do we have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: When do have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: Does Lan have math on...?
Ba: ...


T.asks Ss to work in groups, predict the
missing subjests and the days.


(answer key C3.P.59)
<b>2.Practice: Board Drill: </b>


Thứ 2 Thứ 3 Thứ 4 Thứ 5 Thứ 6 Thứ 7


Toán
Toán
Sử
Địa
GD
Ch.cờ
Văn
Văn
Anh
Anh
Toán
Toán
Địa
Sinh
Anh


T.dục
Văn
Văn
Sử
M.T
Toán
Sinh
Địa
CN
S.H
Example Exchange:


S1: When do we have Math?
S2: We have it on...


T.asks Ss to work in pairs talking about their
real table.


<b>3.Production:</b>


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss predict the missing words in
groups.Then work in pairs with the
complete dialogue.





Ss look at the board for the timetable.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T. asks Ss to fill in their real timetable( only


five subjects they have learn in English) in C2
P.59 and then practice in pairs as the Borad
Drill above.


Write - it - up:


We have math on ...and...,………


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups filling the real table and write
about it.


<b>VI.Consolidation:</b>


* Recall the timetable and the writing as well.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize school subjects and the days of the week.
- Read the text again and answer the questions.


- Exercise 1, 2 P.50 – 51 ( in workbook)


- Prepare section Grammar Practice for the next periop.



<i>( Simple Present Tense, Telling the time,Adjectives with “be”, Question-words,subjects,….)</i>


Date:15.11.2009


Period : 31

<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO</b>


<i>Lesson 7:Grammar PracticeP. 60-61</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:Bythe end of this lesson, Ss will be able to further practice in stdied</b>
knowledge.


I.Knowledge: Simple Present Tense, Tell The Time, Adjective With “Be”, Question
Words, School Subjects, Days Of Week


<b> II.Skills: Speaking</b>


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: (No check) </b>


III.New lesson:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<b>Teacher’ s activities </b> <b>Students’ activities </b>
Grammar practice: 2 P. 60


Example Exchange:
S1:What time is it?
S2: It is seven .



T. asks Ss to work in pairs asking for and
answer about the time.




Dictatation:


T reads: 1.45, 5.30, 8.15, 8.50, 12.00, 6.20, 3.30,
11.15, 10.25, 3.5, 2.40, 6.30, 9.00, 4.35


<b>2.Question Words:</b>
Grammar Practice: 4 P.61
Answer: a.Where d.How


b.How e.Which
c.What f.What
Noughts and Crosses:


Le loi street 2 floors N-G- A
Literature 5.30 Grade 6


Tuesday 7.00 I play football
T.asks Ss to work in two groups making
questions for the given answers.


<b>3.Adjectives with “Be”:</b>
Grammar practice: 3 P.61
Word Cue Drill:


house school city country



street family living room
Example Exchange:


S1: Is your (house)big?
S2: Yes,it is /No it is not.
<b>4.Present Simple Tense:</b>


Find Some One Who:


Find someone who…. Name


…gets up at 5
…goes to bed at 10


…eats a big breakfast every
…has lunch at 12.30


Ss work in pairs.


Ss listen and write ind.,then share in pairs
and in groups.


Ss work in two groups making the
questions for the given answers.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
giving the suitable forms of “Be”


Ss work in groups asking and answering


questions using the given cues.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

<b>Teacher’ s activities </b> <b>Students’ activities </b>
…plays volleyball after schhol


…does the housework
T asks Ss to work in groups.
Word Cue Drill:


Mon Tue Wed
Thur Fri Sat


Example Exchange:


S1: What do you have on Monday?
S2:We have (math).


S1: Do we have English on Mon?
S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.


Grammar Practice 1 P.60 and 5-7 P.61
Answer:


a. get/get/get/gets/get/get


b.do-have/have/does-he/has/do-they/have
c.do-go/go/do-they/go/does-he/goes
d.do-wash/wash/Does-wash/washes


Ss work in pairs.




Ss work in the suitable forms of the verbs
ind.,then share in pairs and in groups.


<b>VI.Consolidation: (involved)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise all the points.


- Exercise 1 P. 51 ( A1-3 P.62-63)
<i>( Country vocab)</i>


Date:18.11.2009


Period : 32 Unit 6 : PLACES

<i>Lesson 1: A 1- 3 P.62- 63</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text about where</b>
Thuy lives to understand the details.


<b> I.Knowledge: country vocabulary</b>
<b> II.Skills: Reading,writing and speaking</b>
<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Pre- Reading:</b>



Pre Teach:


lake ( n ) : <i> (picture)</i>


river ( n ) : <i>(picture)</i>


tree ( n ) : <i> (picture)</i>


flower ( n ) : <i> (picture)</i>


rice-paddy ( n ) : <i>(picture)</i>


park ( n ) : <i>(picture)</i>


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: What and Where:
Open Prediction:


<i> What are near Thuy’s house?</i>


T.asks Ss to write 3 things in their notebook
ind.-in pairs-in groups.


<b>2.While - Reading: </b>


T.asks Ss to read the text A1 P.62 again and
check their predictions ind-in pairs and in


groups.


Ordering vocabulary: P.62:


T reads the second bubble aloud: “ <i>It is</i>
<i>beautiful here .There is a river and……near</i>
<i>our house.”</i>


Answer: a lake - 2 trees - 4
a river - 1 flowers - 5
a rice paddy - 6 a park - 3
Matching: T.asks Ss to read the text again and
guess the meaning of these words from context
and match(with anwer key)


near khách sạn
a yard xinh đẹp
beautiful sân
a hotel gần
Comprehension Questions:


A 1 P.62 questions from a) to f) in pairs.
Answer:


a.She is twelve (years old).


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.



Ss work ind.-in pairs-in groups for the 3
things.


Ss read the text again and check their
prediction ind.- in pairs- and in groups.


Ss listen and order the given vocab ind.-in
pairs and in groups.


Ss work ind.and match the words in
english and their translations.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

b.She is a student.
c.He is Minh.
d.He is twenty.


e.She live in a house near a lake.
f.There is a lake near the house.
<b>3.Post reading:</b>


Picture Drill: P. 62 or P. 63


T.asks Ss to look at the pictures and
models.Then asks Ss to work in pairs.


Example Exchange:
S1:What is that?
S2: it is a river
S1:What are those?


S2:They are trees
Write - It - Up: A 3 P. 63


T. runs through and then asks Ss to work
ind.-share in pairs and in groups.


Answer:


yard / rice - paddy
hotel / lake


river / park
trees / flowers


Ss work in open-closed pairs.


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in groups
complete the sentences.


<b>VI.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P. 61 ( in workbook)</b>


*T.asks Ss to write sentences with “There is…/Ther are…”
Ex: There is a table.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text and answer for details and answer the questions.
- Prepare Unit 6 : Places (A4-5 P.64)



- Complete Exercise 2 P.61 into the notebook.
Date:19.11.2009


Period : 33 Unit 6 : PLACES

<i>Lesson 2: A 4- 5 P.64</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use town and country</b>
vocabulary for describing places where we live.


<b> I.Knowledge: There is a(an)…../There are…</b>
<b> II.Skills: Listening and speaking</b>


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Exercise 2 P.61 (in workbook) </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


Pre Teach:


a town : <i> (picture)</i>


a village : <i>(picture)</i>


a city : <i> (picture)</i>



the country : <i>(explanation)</i>


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: What and Where:


<b>2.Practice: Picture Drill: A 5 P. 64</b>
Pictures from a) to f)
Example Statements:
There is a (hotel) near my house.
There are (trees) near my house.


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning and does the concept check:


<i>There is a(an) + singular noun.</i>
<i>There are + plural noun.</i>


T.runs through the pictures and models and then
asks Ss to work ind-in pairs and in groups.


Example:There is a (hotel) near my house.
a.There’s a hotel near our house.


b.There’re trees near our house.
c.There’s a river near our house.
d.There’s a lake near our house.


e.There’s a school near our house.
f.There’s a rice-paddy near our house.
<b>3.Further Practice:</b>


Chain Game


S1:There’s a hotel near our house.


S2:There’s a hotel and a school near our
house.S3:There’s a hotel, a school and a…..
Guessing Game*:


T.asks Ss to complete the sentence strip”There’s
a….rear our house” in groups of four.


Example Exchange:
S1:Is there a park near your house?
S2:Yes,there is./No,there aren’t.
<b>4.Production:</b>


Write – it – up: A5 P.64


T.models and then asks Ss to write 4-6 sentences
about their places ind.,then share in pairs and in


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.



Ss answer about T’s model sentences
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.- in chorus,then answer about the
concept check and copy into the
notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
groups.


Example:


There is a lake near my house.
There is a park near my house.
There are trees near my house.
There are flowers near my house.
There isn’t a rice-paddy near my house.


Ss work ind.then in pairs and in groups
writing things about their places.


<b>I.Consolidation: Exercise 3 P. 62 ( in workbook)</b>


*T.asks Ss to write sentences with “There is…/Ther are…”
Ex: There is a house.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise the structure:“There is…/Ther are…”
- Memorize vocab.



- Prepare Unit 6 : Places (B1-3 P.65-67)
- Complete Exercise 3 P.62 into the notebook.


Date:21.11.2009


Period : 34 Unit 6 : PLACES


<i>Lesson 3: B- In the city(Sections 1-3 P.65-67)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the en of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text about where Minh</b>
lives to understand town vocab and prepositions of place.


<b> I.Knowledge: Prepositions such as in,on,near,next to</b>
<b> II.Skills: Reading and writing</b>


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Exercise 2 P.63 ( in workbook) </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-reading:</b>


Pre Teach:


a book(store) : (picture)
a restaurant : (picture)
a temple : (picture)
a hospital : (picture)


a factory : (picture)
a museum : (picture)
a stadium : (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: R .O .R :
True/False Prediction:
Near Minh’s house…..
a.There’s a restautant.
b.There’s a lake.
c.There’s a hospital.


T. runs through and asks Ss to work ind.,then in
pairs and in groups predict the statements are true
or false.




<b>2.While-reading: B1 In The City P.65-66</b>
T.teaches<i>(to) work </i>and <i>neighborhood </i>in context.
T. asks Ss to read the text B1P65-66 and correct
their prediction ind.,then in pairs and in groups.
Answer:


a.T


b.F(…a store)


c.T


Comprehension Questions:
ACTIVITIES 1: B1 P.66


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups answering statements are true or false.
Answer:


a. F (…in the city)
b. T


c. F (…a store)
d. T


e. F (…in a hospital)
f. F (…in a factory)
ACTIVITIES 2: B2 P.66


T.asks Ss to read the text again and fill in the
gaps with suitable missing words.


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
for the prediction.



Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
for the checking their guesses.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Answer:


a.city


b.restaurant-bookstore-temple
c.hospital


d.factory


<b>3.Post-reading: B3 P. 67</b>


T.asks Ss to listen to the tape and write the words
you hear in the exercise book ind.,then share in
pairs and in groups.


Answer:
a.museum
b.bookstore
c.river
d.street


<b>VI.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.63 ( in workbook)</b>
*T.asks Ss to write the questions.


Ex: Where do you live?
<b>V.Homework:</b>



- Memorize vocab and the prepositions.


- Read the text for details and answer the questions.
- Complete Exercise 2 P.63 into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 6 : Places (C1-2 P68-69)


<i>( more prepositions of place)</i>


Date:21.11.2009


Period : 35

<b>Unit 6 : PLACES</b>



<i>Lesson 4: C - Around the house(1-2 P.68-69)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text to understand the</b>
description of a house.


<b> I.Knowledge: more prepositions such as in front of,to the right/left of ,behind</b>
<b> II.Skills: Reading and writing</b>


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Exercise 3 P.62 (in workbook) </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Presetation:</b>



Pre Teach:


in front of : (picture)
behind : (picture)
to the left/right of (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: R .O .R :


Presentation Text: C 1 P.68
T.asks Ss to listen to the text.


T.asks Ss to listen guess the meaning of <i>a well</i>


and <i>mountains </i>from the pictureand the
prepositions of place.




<b>2.Practice: </b>


Comprehension Questions: C 1 P.68 a) – f)
T.runs through and models.


Ex: The yard / It is in front of the house.
Answer:



b.The tall trees are behind the house.
c.The mountains are bihind the house.
d.The well is to the left of the house.
e.The flowers are to the right of the house.
f.The house is between the well and the flowers.
Picture Drill: P. 68


T. asks Ss to ask and answer without looking at
the text or writen questions in pairs.


Example Exchange:


S1: Where are the (mountains)?
S2:They’re (behind) the house.
<b>3.Further Practice:</b>


Matching: C 2 P. 69 from a) to c)


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape and find out the
right picture.


Answer:


a) A b) B c) B
Write-it-up:


T. asks Ss to write sentences about the houses.
Ex: There are a lot of flowers in front of the
house.



Noughts and Crosses:


a store a stadium a temple


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress –
meaning and copy into the notebook.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups for the prediction.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups for the checking their guesses.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a tree a hospital a factory


a museum trees a restaurant
T.asks Ss to make sentences about Minh’s house
in two groups.(P. 65 – 66)


e.g. Next to Minh’s house there’s a store.


<b>VI.Consolidation: ( involved in the Noughts and Crosses)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab and the prepositions.


- Read the text for details and answer the questions.


- Exercise 1 P.63(in workbook.)


- Prepare Unit 6 : Places (C 3-4 P. 70-71)


<i>( prepositions to describing a stree)</i>


Date:23.11.2009


Period : 36

<b>Unit 6 : PLACES</b>



<i>Lesson 4: C - Around the house(sections 3-4 P.70-71)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able use ”Where is…/are…? “</b>
questions and answers with town vocabulary and prepositions of place to describe a street.
<b> I.Knowledge: town vocabs and prepositions </b>


<b> II.Skills: speaking </b>


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 1 P.63(in workbook.)</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presetation:</b>


Pre Teach: (use picture C 3 P. 70)


drugstore (n)


toystore (n)
movie theater (n)
police station (n)
bakery (n)
between (pre)
opposite (pre)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus, then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Checking: R .O .R :


Presentation Text: C 3 P.70


T.asks Ss to listen to the text about a street.


<b>2.Practice: </b>


Picture Drill: C 4 a) P.70


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss listen to the text.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T.ask Ss to ask and answer the questions about


the picture in exercise C3.


T.runs through and models, then asks Ss to
work in pairs.


Example:


S1: Where is the movie theater?


S2:It’s between the balery and the drustore.
Guessing Game: C 4 b) P. 71


T.runs through and models, then asks Ss to
work in two groups.


Example:


S1:It’s opposite the movie theater.What is it?
S2:It’s the police station.


S1: Yes, That’s right.
<b>3.Production: Networks</b>


Town <i>the stadium</i>
<i>a factory</i>





Country


<i>village</i> <i>a rice-paddy</i>


Bingo*:


<i>T reads:</i> the bookstore,the mountains, the park,
the restaurant , the hospital, the river, the
drustore, the factory, trees, the police station,
the bakery, the lake, the museum, therice-paddy
, the movie theater,the stadium, the hotel, the
village


T. asks Ss to work ind.with the game.
Chain game:*


S1: There’s a bakery near my house.


S2: There’s a bakery and a bookstore near my
house.


S3: There’s a bakery and a bookstore and
a….etc.


Servey: C 5 P. 71


S1: What’s (in front of ) your house?


S2: A rice paddy.


Name


Ha in front of…? a rice-paddy
behind…?


questions about the picture.


Ss work ind.then in two groups with the
guessing game.


Ss work with the whole class filling in the
nets with studied town and country
vocabs.


Ss work ind.with the game .


In groups of five or six,Ss work with the
game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
opposite…?


to the left of…?
to the right of…?
Near…?


T.asks Ss to work in four groups,ask and
answer questions filling in the table.



<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.64 in workbook(write the answers)</b>
Ex: The house is to the left of the museum.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab and the prepositions.


- Read the text for details and answer the questions.
- Complete the exercise 2 P.64 in to the notebook.
- Revise all studied knowledge for One-Preiod Test.


<i> (Simple Present Tense,Prepositions,vocabs…)</i>


Date:20.12.2009


Preiod : 37

<b>TEST</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be tested some studied</b>
knowledge for grade.


<b> I.Knowledge: Simple Present Tense,Prepositions,Vocabs….</b>
<b> II.Skills:Writing and reading</b>


<b>B.PRECEDURE:</b>
<b> I.Settlement:</b>


<b> II.Handing out the testing papers:</b>
<b> III.Testing:</b>



Question:


<i>I.Chọn a,b,c hoặc d để hoàn thành những câu sau:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

2.Is Thu’s school big?


<i>a. Yes, she is.b. Yes, it is.c.No, she isn’t. d. No, it is.</i>


3.The toystore is……..the movie theater and drugstore.


<i>a. behindb. to the leftc. nextd. near</i>


4.There is a river in front ……. my house.


<i>a. ofb. toc. atc. and</i>


5. <i><b>10 + 5</b></i> =……


<i>a. ten b. fiveteenc. fiftyd. fifteen</i>


6.My family ……in the livingroom.


<i> a. He is a.b. He is a doctor.c. He is doctor.d. He is doctors.</i>


7.My mother is a doctor.She works in a……


<i>a. factoryb. museumc. hospitald. stadium</i>


8. 7.25 - What’s time is it?



<i>a. It’s seven twenty-five. b. It’s twenty-five seven.</i>
<i> c. It’s seven past twenty-five. d. It’s twenty-five to seven.</i>
<i>II.Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc:</i>


1. We (live) ……..……..in the city.


2. There (be) ………a lake near my house.


3. She (wash) ………….……her face at 6.00 every morning.
4. My brother (watch) ……….……..T.V after school..


<i>III. Hồn thành đoạn văn sau, sau đó trả lời câu hỏi :</i>


Hello. My name………..Lan. I’m twelve………..old. I’m a student. I………a brother,
Nam. He’s…………engineer. He’s twenty-seven. We live ………..a house…………..a
lake.Our house ………..a yard. Our house is……..big. It’s small.


Trả lời những câu hỏi sau:
1. How old is Lan?


………..
2. What’s her brother’s name?


………..
3. Where do they live?


………..
4. Is their house big?


………..


<b>IV. Handing in the paper:</b>


<b>V.Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

Date:25.11.2009


Period : 38

<b>TEST-CORRECTION</b>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be corrected their testing papers.
I.Knowledge: Tested points


II. Skills: Speaking
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


I.Settlement: Greeting and checking the attendance
<b> II.15-monute test:</b>


<i>* Choose a,b,c or d to complete the following sentences:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

2. My father works……...a factory.
a.atb. withc.ofd. in


3. Every morning, I get up……..6.30 .
a.atb. pastc.ofd. in


4. There………….many books on the table.
a. be b. are c. is d. am


5. My mother…….the housework every day.


a.do b.doesc. to dod. not do


6. Minh……….in a small house in the city.
a.liveesb.to livec.livesd.living


7. Is your house small?
a.Yes, I am. b. No, I am not.
c.Yes, it is. d. yes, they are.


8. Mai and Ha………..T.V after school.
a.watchb.watchesc.watchingd.to watch
9. My sister……..a nurse.


a. is b. are c. be d. am
10.They…….soccer after class.


a. play b. plays c. playes d. playing
<b> III.Handing out the papers for test correction:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<i>I.Chọn a,b,c hoặc d để hoàn thành những câu </i>
<i>sau:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers for the
questions and reasons for the choices,then
gives the feedback.


* Answer:



1. a - is 5. d - fifteen


2. b - What 6. b - He’s a doctor.
3. b - are 7. c - She


4. b - my 8. d - How


<i>II.Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn </i>
<i>chỉnh:</i>


T. runs through and elicit the answers from Ss
and then gives the feedback.


* Answer:
1.He’s ten years old.


2.Is that your classroom?


3.I live on Ly Thuong Kiet street.
4.This is not my book.


Ss read the multiple choices again and
then give the answers and the reasons for
their choices.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>


<i>III. Điền từ thích hợp vào chổ trống:</i>


T. runs through the passage and ask Ss to fill


in the gaps with suitable given words and
reasons for the choices ind.,then in pairs and in
groups,then gives the feedback.


* Answer:


1.student 4.years
2.are 5.sister


3.students 6.in


Ss read the passage again and then fill in
the gaps with suitable given words to
complete the passage.


<b>IV. Mark reporting: </b>


* T.asks Ss to read their marks again and Ss report into the mark-book.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Revise the studied points.


- Prepare Unit 7: Your House ( A1-2 P.72 - 73)


Date:27.11.2009


Period : 39 Unit 7 : YOUR HOUSE


<i>Lesson 1: A-Is Your House Big?(sections A 1-2 P.72-73)</i>




<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able listen to a dialogue and read a</b>
letter about a house to understand the details.


<b> I.Knowledge: vocabs </b>
<b> II.Skills: listening,reading </b>
<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 2 P.63(in workbook.)</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Pre-Listening: </b>
T/F Prediction(Grid)


T.asks Ss to tick(P) Yes/No ind.,then in groups.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


Yes No


… big? P


… small? P


… a yard? P


… a well? P



… flowers? P


… trees? P


Presentation Text: A 1 P.72
T.asks Ss to listen to the dialogue.
<b>2.While-Listening: </b>


T.asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


Recall:


T.asks Ss to use the grid to talk about Hoa.
Example Statements:


Hoa’s house is small.It isn’t big.There is a
yard.There are flowers.There isn’t a well.There
aren’t trees.


<b>3.Pre-Reading: </b>
Pre-Teach:


a garden: (picture)
a vegetable: (picture)
a photo(graph): (realia)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T. reports on the


board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: Slap the board
T/F Prediction:


a. The house is in the country.
b. There’s a river near the house.


c. There are trees to the left of the house.
d. There are two gardents.


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in groups and predict
the statements are true or false.


Answer:


a) T b) F c) F d) T
<b>4. While-Reading: A 2 P.73</b>


Ind.,then in pairs,T.asks Ss to read the text and
answer the Y/N questions.(Matching) from a) to e)
Answer:


a) – D ; b) – A ; c) – E ; d) – B ; e) – C


Ss work ind.,then in groups for
prediction.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs reading the
text and check their prediction.



Ss work ind.,then in pairs talking
about Hoa’s house.


Ss answer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress –
meaning and copy into the notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>5. Post – Reading / Listening:</b>


Transformation Writing:


From the main text of the letter,T.asks Ss to
change the underlined information to describe
their own house and then draw a picture of it as
photo.


My House


There’s a flower garden in front of the house.
There’s a vegetable garden behind the house.
To the left of the house, there’s a lake.To the
right is a of the house, there are tall trees. Here a
photo.


Ind.,then in groups; Ss read the letter
for matching the questions with
suitable short answers.



Ind., Ss change the underlined
information for their real own house.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 4 P.67 in workbook</b>
Ex: A: Are there any flowers?


B: Yes, there are.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Read the text and the dialogue for details and answer the questions.
- Complete the exercise 4 P.67in to the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 7: Your House ( A1; 3-4 P. 72-75)


<i> (Is there…/Are there……?and short answers)</i>


Date:2.12.2009


Period : 40

<b>Unit 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>



<i>Lesson 2: A - Is Your House Big?(sections B 1; 3 - 4 P. 72-75)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able listen to use the facilities vocab</b>
to describe the town.


<b> I.Knowledge: Is there a…/Are there…? with short answers </b>
<b> II.Skills: listening,reading </b>



<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 4 P.67</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presetation: </b>
Pre-Teach:


a bank (picture)
a click (picture)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a super market (picture)


a shop (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: What and Where
Presentation Text: A 1 P.72


T.asks Ss to listen to the dialogue again.
Model Sentence:



- Is there a yard / well?


Yes, there is./No, there isn’t.
- Are there any flowers / trees?
Yes, there are./No, there aren’t.
<b>2.Practice: </b>


Picture Drill: (use the pictures on P.74 – A3)
a) Example Exchange:


S1: What is that ?
S2: It’s a hotel.
S1: What are those?
S2: They’re flowers.
b) Example Exchange:


S1: Is there a (hotel) near your house?
S2: Yes, there is./No, there isn’t.


S1: Are there any (shops) near your house?
S2: Yes, there are./No, there aren’t.


T.asks Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
the questions about the pictures.


<b>3.Further Practice: </b>
Matching* A 5 P. 75


T. asks Ss to listen to the describtion and choose


the right house of the three.


Answer b)


A4 P. 74 or Listen and Draw


T.asks Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
the questions to find which house their partner
chooses.


answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss work in two teams.
Ss listen to the dialogue.


Ss work ind.then in pairs for asking and
answering about the pictures.


Ss listen and choose the right picture
ind.,then share in pairs and in groups.


In pairs, Ss choose one of the three
houses, then ask and answer the
questions and find which house their
friend chooses


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 5 P.67 in workbook</b>
Ex: house



<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize facilities vocab.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

- Prepare Unit 7: Your House ( B 1 P. 76-77)


<i> (the differences between the town and the country)</i>


Date:3.12.2009


Period : 41

<b>Unit 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>



<i>Lesson 3: B - Town or Country(section B 1-3 P.76-77)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able listen to read a text about Ba’s</b>
and Chi’s houses to talk understand the differences between the town and the country.
<b> I.Knowledge: talking about the differences between the town and the country.</b>
<b> II.Skills: listening,reading </b>


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: A 3 P.74</b>


- Is there a bank?


- Are there any flowers?


III.New lesson:



<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Pre-Reading: </b>
Pre-Teach:


noisy (adj) ≠ quiet (adj) (antonym)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a market (picture)


a zoo (picture)
rice-paddy = paddy field (synonym)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: R .O . R
Kim’s Game:


B1 Picture, P.76 “There’s a zoo, a post office…”
B1 Picture, P.76 “There’s a lake, a river…”
T.asks Ss to work ind.with the game.


<b>2.While - Reading: B 1 Town or Country?</b>
T.asks Ss to listen to the text about Ba’s and chi’s
houses.


Comprehension Questions(Matching): B 1 P. 76
T.asks Ss to work ind., then in pairs reading the


text again and choose the correct answers.


Answer


a) Yes, he does. d) No, she doesn’t.
b) No, he doesn’t. e) No, there aren’t.
c) Yes, it is. f) Yes, it is.


Write-it-up: A2 P.77


T.asks Ss to read about Ba, then write sentences
about Chi’s house ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


Example:


Chi lives in a house in the country.
…….


<b>3.Post - Reading: </b>
Brainstorm


T. asks Ss to find out the differences b/t the town
and the country filling in the table in two teams.


In town In the country


…it’s noisy.


…we live in apartments.



…there aren’t any paddy fields.
…there’s a zoo.


…there are shops.
…etc.


…it’s quiet.
…etc.


T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss work in two teams.
Ss work ind. with the game.


Ss listen to the text ind.


Ss work ind.then in pairs for asking and
answering (matching).


Ss work ind. reading about Ba then
write about Chi’s house.


Ind.,then in pairs, Ss brainstorm the
differences b/t the town and the country.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>V.Homework:</b>



Memorize vocab and the differences b/t the town and the country.
Complete the exercise 2 P.68 into the notebook.


Do exercise 3 P. 69 into the notebook.


Prepare Unit 7: Your House ( C 1- 3 P. 78-80)


<i> (talking about the transportation)</i>


Date:5.12.2009


Period : 42 Unit 7 : YOUR HOUSE


<i>Lesson 4: C – On The Move(section C 1-3 P.78-80)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the transportation.</b>
<b> I.Knowledge: “How’ questions and “by car/bike/train…”</b>


<b> II.Skills: Speaking and Listening</b>
<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Read the text on P.76-77 and answer the questions:</b>


<b> Questions: - Does Ba live in the country? (No, he doesn’t.)</b>
- Is it noisy? (Yes, it is.)
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>



<b>1.Presentation: (use pictures on P.78-79)</b>
Pre-Teach:


(to) travel : ( explanation)
by bike/motorbike/bus/car/train/plane (picture)
T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Check vocab: What and Where


Presentation Text: C 1- 2 P.78 – 79


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape and then parctice
the text with a partner.


Model Sentences:


How do you go to school ?
does he travel work ?
I go /travel by bike.


He goes/travels car.


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.



<b>2.Practice: </b>


Substitution Drill: C 2 P.79


T.asks Ss to look at the pistures and runs through.
T.models.


Example Exchange:


S1: How does (Lien) go to school?
S2: She goes by bike.


S1: How does (Mr Hai) travel to work?
S2: He travels by (train).


T asks Ss to work in pairs for 11 cues such as
Lien, Thu, Tuan, Hoa, Houng, Mr Hai, Mrs Lan,
Mr Ba, Miss Hoa, Mr Kim, Mis Dung.


<b>3.Production: </b>


Noughts and Crosses:


Mrs Dung Mrs Lan Mr Hai


Lien Thu Tuan


Mr Ba Mr Kim Miss Hoa


T.runs through and then asks Ss to work in two


groups, ask and answer using “ How” questions
and “by bike/car..” and making referce to C1
P.78.


Ss work in two teams.
Ss work ind. with the game.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy into
the notebook-answer T’s questions
about concept check.


Ss work in poen-closed pairs using
“How” questions and “by…” to talk
about the transformation.


Ind two groups, Ss play the game.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.70* in workbook</b>
Example: a) How does Mr Ba go to work?
He walks.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Memorize “How: questions and “by bike/car..” to talk about the transportation.
- Complete the exercise 2 P.70 into the notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<i> (Simple Present to talk about the habitul actions)</i>



Date:7.12.2009


Period : 43

<b>Unit 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>



<i>Lesson 5: C – On The Move(section C 4-5 P.80-81)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a text about Hoang’s</b>
daily routines for further practice Simple Present habitual actions.


<b> I.knowledge: Revise Simple Present for talking about habittual actions.</b>
II.Skills: reading and Speaking and Listening


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: a) Mrs Dung / bus</b>


b)You (real answer)


Answer: a) - How does Mr Dung go to work?
She goes by bus.


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Pre-reading: </b>
Open Prediction:



What time?
He gets up.


He leaves the house.
School stats.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<b>Teacher’ s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
He has lunch.


T. ask Ss to work ind., then in groups and predict
what time Hoang dies the following things.


<b>2.While-reading:C 4 “Hi.My name is Hoang...”</b>
T.asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


Answer:


What time?


He gets up. <i>5.30</i>


He leaves the house. <i>6.30</i>


School stats. <i>7.00</i>


School ends. <i>11.30</i>


He has lunch. <i>12.00</i>



Comprehension Questions C 4 P.80 a) - f)
T.runs through and asks Ss to work ind.then in
two groups with Lucky Number game.


Lucky Numbers:


1. What time does Hoang get up?
2. What time do you get up?


3. What time does he go to school?
4. LN


5. How do you go to school?


6. Does Hoang go to school by car?
7. LN


8. LN


9. What time do your classes start?
10.Waht time do you have lunch?
<b>3.Post-reading: </b>


Survey


Name What time?


get up <i>Thu</i> <i>5.30</i>


go to school


classes start
classes end
go home
have lunch


T.asks s to work in groups of four or five asking
and answering the questions filling in the table.
Exampl Exchange:


S1: What time do you get up,(Thu)?
S2: I get up at 5.30.


prediction.


Ss work ind., then in pairs and in
groups reading the text and check their
prediction.


Ss read the text again and answer the
questions ind.,then groups playing the
game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>IV.Consolidation: - Recall the results of the Survey</b>


T. asks some group representatives recall the results of their group.
Ex: Thu gets up at 5.30. And she….


<b>V.Homework:</b>


Revise Simple Present for habitual actions.


Do exercise 3 and 4 P.71.


Prepare Unit 8: Out and About ( A1 P. 82)


<i>( Present Progreesive Tense positive statements to talk about actions happing now)</i>


Date:8.12.2009


Period : 44 Unit 8 : OUT AND ABOUT

<i> Lesson 1: A -What are you doing?</i>

(A1 P. 82)
<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about actions happing now.
<b> I.knowledge: Present Progressive Tense positive statements with “ I / He / She ”</b>
II.Skills: Speaking and Listening


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: REVISION: Picture cue drill Answer</b>


a.Hoa/get up at 6 <i> a. Hoa gets up at six.</i>


b.

She/go to school in the afternoon

<i>b.She goes to school in the </i>
<i>afternoon.</i>


c.He / play soccer after school <i>c.He plays soccer after school.</i>
d.Every evening / I /do my homework <i>d.Every evening, I do my </i>
<i>homework.</i>



<i> </i>


T. asks Ss to make sentences with the given cues ind.,using Present Simple Tense.


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


1.PRESENTATION:
a.Preteach:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
. (to) wait for: (picture)


. video game(n) : (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


b.Checck vocab<i>: Matching</i>


.T. asks Ss to match the English words with
suitable pictures.


c.Presntation Text: A1 / 82


T. asks Ss to listen to to the tape.
Model sentences:


<i>I am riding my bike.</i>
<i> He is riding hos bike.</i>


<i> We are waiting for a train.</i>


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss
to repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<i><b>*</b></i>

<i><b>THE PRESNT PROGRESSIVE TENSES</b></i>

<i><b>:</b></i>



.Form: S + { is / am / are }+Ving : đang
Use: <i>Takling about actions happening now.</i>
2.PRACTICE<i>:</i> Picture Drill


T runs through ask Ss to work ind. and
make sentences with present progressive using
the clips.


*Example: She is riding her bike.


T calls some Ss to stand up and read their
answer and T gives the feedback.


*Answer:


.She is ridng her bike.


.They are walking to school.



.He is riding his bike,
.They are waiting a train.


3.PRODUCTION:Noughts and Crosses:
He / play


Video games


He / drive
his car


They / wait
for a train
I


play soocer


They/travel to


school by bus <sub>travel to work</sub>Mr Kim


She/ walk
to school
I/walk to
school
He/ride his
bike


T.asks Ss to build up sentences using the given
cues in 2 teams-feedback.



*Answer:


T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss match the English words with the
pitures ind,then in pairs.


Ss listen to the text.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy into
the notebook-answer T’s questions
about concept check.


Ss look at the pictures and make
sentences with the present progressive
tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
1.He is playing video games.


2.He is driving his car.


3.They are waiting for a train.
4.I am playing soccer.


5.They are traveling to school by bus.


6.Mr kim is traveling to work.


7.She is walking to school.
8.I am walking to school.
9.He is riding his car.


IV.CONSOLIDATION:(involved in the games)
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


.Revise the present progressive tense.
.Memorize vocab.


.Read A2-7 P83-85 in advance at home.


<i>(present progressive with WH-question words)</i>


.Do exercise 1/ 72 (in workbook)


*<i>Example</i>: a. playing


Date:10.12.2009


Period : 45

<b>Unit 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<i> Lesson 2: A -What are you doing?</i>

(A 2-7 P. 83-85)
<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about actions happing now.
<b> I.knowledge: Present Progressive “Wh” Questions with “ She/He/They”</b>
II.Skills: Speaking and Listening



<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 1/ 72 (in workbook)</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


1.PRESENTATION:


Presntation Text: A2 P.82 and A3 P. 83
T. asks Ss to listen to to the tape.


Model sentences:


What ‘s (is) he/she doing?
are you/they


- S/he’s doing his homework.
They are waiting for a train.


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-a sks
Ss to repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
on the board-and does the concept check.


.Form:



Question Words+{ is / are }+S+Ving+O : đang
Use: <i>Takling about actions happening now.</i>


2.PRACTICE<i>:</i> Picture Drill A3+4 P.83-84
T runs through ask Ss to work ind. then in
pairs,using the present progressive and


pictures.
*Example:


a) S1: What is he doing?


S2: He’s doing his homework.
b) S1: What are they doing?


S2: They are waiting for a train.
*Answer:


c) -What is he doing?
He is driving his car.
d) -What is he doing?


He is riding his motorbike.
e)-What is he doing?


He is waiting for a train.
f))-What is she doing?
He is waiting for a bus.



3.FURTHER PRACTICE: Answer Given
( A6 P.85)


T. runs through and then ask Ss to work
ind.,then in pairs.


businessman (n) : thương nhân
Example: a) What does Mr Ha do?
Answer


a) Where is he going?
b)What does Miss Hoa do?
Where is she going?


c)What do Mr Tuan and Mrs Vui do?
Where are they going?


Ss answer T’s model elicitation


questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy into
the notebook-answer T’s questions about
concept check.


Ss look at the pictures and make
sentences with the present progressive
tense.


Ss look at the poster for the given
cues-work in two teams and make sentences
with present progressive tenses.



IV.CONSOLIDATION:Exercise 3 P.73 (in workbook)
Ex: Who is that?


T. ask Ss to write a question for each answer, using the cues.
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Revise the present progressive tense “Wh” Questions with “ She/He/They”


- Complete exercise 3 P.73 into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 8: Out and About ( B1 P. 86-87)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

Date:14.12.2009


Period : 46

<b>Unit 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>


<i>Lesson 3: B –A truck driver( B1 P. 86-87)</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a picture story about a truck driver to
understand the main ideas .and details.


<b> I.knowledge: Present Progressive Tense about a truck driver.</b>
II.Skills: Speaking and Listening


<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-Reading:</b>


Pre-Teach



truck driver (n): (picture)
farmer (n): (picture)


(to) load : ≠ (to) unload: (explanation)
food stall (n) (picture)


(to) arrive at: (explanation)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Matching


1.truck driver a.quầy thực phẩm
2.farmer b.người lái xe tải
3.(to) load c.dỡ hàng xuống
4.(to) unload d.chất hàng lên
5.foodstall e.đến


6.(to) arrive at f.nông dân
Answer


1 - b ; 2 - f ; 3 - d ; 4 - c ; 5 - a ; 6 - e
Ordering Statements:



1. going to HN


2.meeting the farmer
3.having breakfast


4.going on a farm
5.loading vegetable
6.unloading the truck.


T.asks Ss to reorder the statements about a truckter
driver,s activities ind.,then in pairs and in groups.
<b>2.While-Reading</b><i>:</i>


T asks Ss to read the story and check their
prediction and fill in the “I read” column.
Answer: a - 4 ; b - 2 ; c - 5 ; d - 1 ; e - 6 ; f - 3
Comprehension Questions: B1 P.87 a) - f)
a) He’s a truck driver.


b) He’s going to a farm.


c) A farmer is waiting for him.


d) He’s taking the vegetable to the market.
e) He’s eating a big breakfast.


f) At a foodstall.


<b>3.Post-Reading: Lucky numbers</b>
1.LN


2.What are they doing on P.10?


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in


chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in two teams, match the
words in English and with the
Vietnamese..


Ss reorder the statements about a
truckter driver,s activities ind.,then
in pairs and in groups.


Ss work in pairs,ask and answer the
questions.


I think I read


a 3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
3.What are Ss doing on P.21?


4.What are they doing on P.22?
5.What are they doing on P.37?
6. LN


7.What is he doing on P.51?


8.What is he doing on P.56, the first one?
9.5.What are they doing on P.67?



10.What are Thu and Lien doing on P.78?
11. LN


12.What is Hoang doing on P.80?


13.What are they doing on P.86, picture c?


14.What’s Mr Quang doing on page 86, picture d?
15.What is he doing on P.87?


Ss work in two team with the game.


IV.CONSOLIDATION: (involved)
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Read the picture strory and answer the questions.


- Prepare Unit 8: Out and About ( B1 P. 86-87)
- Do exercise 3 P. 74 (in workbook)


- Prepare Unit 8: Out and About ( C2-3 P.89-90)


<i>( Modals” Can/Can’t” to talk about what we are allowed or not alowed to on the roads)</i>


Date:16.12.2009


Period : 47 Unit 8 : OUT AND ABOUT



<i> Lesson 4: C - Road Signs (Section C1-2P.89-90</i>

<i>)</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use”Can/Can’t” statements and traffic
vocabulary to talk about what you are allowed or not allowed to do on the road.
<b> I.knowledge: Modal Verbs Can/Can’t(V</b><i>M</i>)


II.Skills: Speaking and Listening
<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: T. ask Ss to read the picture strory and answer the questions.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
1.PRESENTATION:


Pre-Teach
Policeman (n) :
Difficult (adj) :
Sign (n) :


One-way (adj) :
(to) park :


(to) turn left/ right


(to) slow down ≠ (to) go fast



T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R.O.R


Noughts and Crosses: ( On Poster)


T asks Ss to work in two groups using the Present
Progressive tense with the game.


driver a car ride a bike walk
ride a motorbike park wait for a bus


turn left go straight turn right
Example Exchange:


S1: What’s he doing?
S2: He’s driving a car.
Presntation Text: C1- Road signs P.89
T. asks Ss to listen to to the tape.


Comprehension Questions:
a) What does Hoan do?


b)Is his job difficult?Tell me why in Vietnamese.
c)What does this sign meam?


<i>(T.points to the “You can park here” sign P.89)</i>


d)What does this sign meam?



<i>(T.points to the “You can’t park here” sign P.89)</i>


T. asks Ss work ind-in pairs read the text again and
answer the questions.


Model sentences:
You can park here.


You can’t go into that street.(can’t = can not)
T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-a sks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


Form: S + VM + Vinf + O


Use: <i>Takling about what you are allowed or not</i>
<i>allowed.</i>


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress
– meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in two groups.


Ss work in two groups,using the
given cues and the Present
Progressive tense.



Ss look at the pictures and make
sentences with the present


progressive tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
2.PRACTICE<i>:</i> Picture Drill P.89


T runs through ask Ss to work ind. then in
pairs,using the modals Can/Can’t.


Example Exchange:
S1: What does this sign mean?
S2: You can (park here).


3.FURTHER PRACTICE: Write- It-Up* <sub> C2 P89-90</sub>


T. runs through and then ask Ss to work ind.,then in
pairs.


Answer
a) You can turn left.
b) You can’t turn right.
c) You can go ahead.


d) You can’t ride a motorbike.


IV.CONSOLIDATION:Exercise 1 P.75 (in workbook)



Ind.,T.asks Ss to tell their partner if s/he can do these things.
Example a) You can turn left.


<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise the modals Can/Can’t to talk about what you are allowed or not allowed.


- Complete exercise 1 P.75 into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 8: Out and About ( C3-4 P.90-91)


<i> (Modals “Must/Mustn’t” to talk about the obligation/prohibition)</i>


Date:18.12.2009


Period : 48

<b>Unit 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<i> Lesson 5: C - Road Signs (Section C 3-4 P.90-91</i>

<i>)</i>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able read a text about the Road Signs to understand
Must/Mustn’t for obligation/prohibition.


<b> I.knowledge: Modal Verbs Must/Mustn’t (V</b><i>M</i>)


II.Skills: Speaking and Listening
<b>B.TEACHING PROCEDURE:</b>



<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: T. ask Ss to read the text and answer the questions.</b>


III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>Teacher’activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
dangerous (adj)
difficult
an accident
an intersection
(to) help
(to) warn


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus ,then
T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: R.O.R
T/F prediction


T asks Ss to look at the pictures in C4 P.90 and choose the
correct statements for each one.(Answer Key included)


a) Slow down P


Go straight


b) Turn left P



Don’t turn right
c) Turn right


Go straight or turn left

P



d) Slow down


Don’t go straight ahead P


e) Park here


Don’t park here

P



f) Cars and truck go here P


Motorbike go here
g) Don’t go straight


Don’t turn right or lef tP


h) Park here P


Don’t park here
<b>While-Reading: C 3 Must and Mustn’t P. 90</b>


T.asks Ss to read the text and correct their prediction
ind.,then share in pairs and in groups.


<b>3. Post-Reading: Listening C 4 P.91 a) - h)</b>



T. asks Ss to look at the pictures and asks Ss to listen to the
tape and number the suitable sign ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


Answer


1.You can’t turn right. (c)
2.There’s a stop sign. You must stop (d)
3.You can park your car here. (h)
4.You must slow down.There’s an intersection ahead. (a)
5.You can enter into that road. Look at that sign. (g)
6.We can turn left here. (b)
7.You can’t ride moptorbike on that street. (f)
Picture Drill* <sub> C 4 P.91 a) – g)</sub>


Example Exchange:
S1: What does this sign mean?
S2: You must (slow down).


T runs through ask Ss to work ind. then in pairs,using
the modals Must/Mustn’t and the road signs.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s
model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy
into the notebook.



Ss work in two groups.


Ss work in two groups,using
the given cues and the
Present Progressive tense.


Ss look at the pictures and
make sentences with the
present progressive tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.75 (in workbook)


Ind.,T.asks Ss to complete the sentences, using Can/Can’t ; Must/Mustn’t+Vinf.
Example a) The lights are red.You <i>must stop</i>.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise the modals Must/Mustn’t for obligation/prohibition.


- Complete exercise 2 P.75 into the notebook.
- Prepare Grammar Practice P.92-95


<i> (Modals, Simple Present vs Present progressive, Prepositions of place, question words)</i>


Date:19.12.2009


Period : 49

<b> GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>


<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>


By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to further practice in some studied points.


<b> I.Knowledge: Simple Present vs, Present Progressive, Preposition of Place, Question.</b>
Word, Can/Can’t, Must/Mustn’t.


<b> II.Skills: speaking and writing</b>
<b>B. PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>VERBS OF TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORT </b>
Pyramid Networks Bingo


For Bingo,T. reads: stop, ride a bike, wait, turn right,
drive, load, go fast, travel, go straight, turn left, park,
unload, walk, take, warn, slow down


<b>PRESENT PROGRESSIVE WITH “I / She / He”</b>
Chain game:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
S1: I’m watching TV


S2: She’s watching TV and I’m playing…



S3: She’s watching TV. he’s playing video games and
I’m …ect


<b>PRESENT PROGRESSIVE ALL PERSONS</b>
Grammar or Practice: Task 2 P. 92 a – g


Yes / No question with Present Progressive.


T.asks Ss to put the given verbs in Present Progressive.
Answer:


a. Minh is riding his bike.
b. They are waiting fo r a bus.
c. She is watching T.V.


d. We are playing soccer.
e. He is listening to music.
f. They are walking to school.
g. He is traveling to Hanoi.
Question Game:


T.asks Ss to fill in the sentences strip.
Example Exchange:


S1: Are you driving?
S2: No, I’m not.


S3: Are you……..ect?



T.asks Ss to work in pairs with the game.
Mapped dialogue:


<i><b>X</b></i>


<i><b>X</b></i>


<i><b>X</b></i>


What…..?



Example Exchange:


S1: Are you listening to music?
S2: No, I’m not


S1: Are you listening to the radio?
S2: No. I’m reading books.


S1: Are……..?


PRESENT SIMPLE vs.PRESENT PROGRESSIVE
Gap-Fill: Task 5 P.94


T. asks Ss to fill in the gaps with suitable forms of


Ss work in groups of four or five
with the game.


Ss work ind-in pair and in groups


putting the verbs in Present
Progressive.


Ss work in groups with the game.


Ss look at the pictures, then work
in opened-closed pairs asking and
answering the questions using the
pictures.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
verbs ind., then in pairs.


PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
Matching: Task 3 P.93


T..asks Ss to fill in the gaps with suitable given
prepositions for a complete passage.


Answer:


in; in front of ; behind; opposite; to the left; to the right
QUESTION WORDS:


MUST and CAN


Nought and Crosses:


S1: What does this sign mean?
S2: You can park here.



Tsars Ss to work in groups with the game.


forms of verbs according to
Simple Present or Present
Progresive ind., then in pairs .


Ss work ind. filling in the gaps
with suitable given prepositions
for a complete passage.


Ss work in two groups with the
game.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>


<b>V. Homework: - Revise the studied knowledge for the next class.</b>
Date: 24.12.2009


Period : 50

<b> REVISION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some grammartical </b>
points for the fist term test.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>”ToBe”, Numbers, Question Words,Simple Present Tense….


<b> II.Skills: Speaking and writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
I.Warm-up. Lucky numbers.


T. has Ss play the game in two groups.


<i>1. What’s your name?</i>
<i>3. 20+19=……</i>


<i>5. How do you spell your name?</i>


<i>6. How many pens are there?(There is one)</i>
<i>7. What does your father do?</i>


<i>9. What’s time is it?(7.00)</i>
<i>10. Hoa….in class 6A.(is)</i>


II. Practice.


1.Complete the following sentences :
1. We ___ in class


2. ___ your father an architect ?
3. It ___ not a ruler


4. Tuan and Mai ___ students.
5. Those lamps ___ new.


6. There ___ an armchair in this room


7. ___ that your bookshelf ?


8. Her grandfather and grandmother ___ old.
9. ___ they nurses ?


10.___ there many people in your family ?


T. asks Ss to recall the forms of “ToBe” and then
supply the suitable forms fo “ToBe” ind.,then in
pairs.


Answer:


1.Are 6.Is
2.Is 7.Is
3.Is 8.Are
4.Are 9.Are
5.Are 10.Are
2.Write the numbers in words.


a. 23+34=…………. f. 59-9=………….
b. 27+53=…………. g. 15+7=………….
c. 4+17=…………. h. 76:2=………….


d. 50: 10=…………. i. 100: 4………….
e. 12 x 6=…………. f. 90-80=………….
T. asks Ss to work ind.- in pairs and writing the
numbers in words.


Answer:



a.forty-seven f.fifty


b.ninety g.twenty-two
c.seventy-one h.thirty-six
d.seventy-two i.twenty-five
e.five f.ten


Ss work in two groups with the
game.


Ss recall the forms of “ToBe” and
then supply the suitable forms fo
“ToBe” ind.,then in pairs.


Ss work with their partners with the
dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
3.Supply the suitable form of the verbs:


a.Ba and Thu ( be)______students.


b.Lan ( not play)_______games after school.
c.My brother ( live)______in Ho Chi Minh City.
d.We (listen)_____to music now.


e.My father always ( get )______up at six.


f.There (be)______twenty classrooms in his school.


g.Our school ( have)______a big yard.


h.Where (be)________your father now?
i.He (watch)______TV in his room.


j.He isn't in his room. He (play)______in the garden.
k.They (play)_______volleyball every afternoon.
l.Listen! Mai (sing)______


m.We (do)______our homework now.
n.I (be)_____in grade 6.


o.What your sister ( do )______?- She is reading.
p.Your mother (go)_____to work by bus?


T. runs through and asks ss to work ind. then share in
pairs and in groups putting the verbs in correct
forms.


Answer :


a.are j.is playing
b.doesnot play k.plays
c.lives l.is singing
d.is listening m.are doing
e.gets n.am


g.has o.doing
h.is p.goes
i.is watching



Ss supply the suitable form of the
verbs ind.,then in pairs and in
groups.


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>


<b>V. Homework: - Revise the studied knowledge for the next class.</b>
Date: 25.12.2009


Period : 51

<b> REVISION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some grammartical </b>
points for the fist term test.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>”ToBe”, Simple Present Tense…


<b> II.Skills: Speaking and writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
I. Warm up: Slap the board


Go to school Wash the face
Take a shower


Have breakfast Get up


T.asks Ss to work in groups of five with the game.
II. Practice.


Present Simple Tense:


T. asks Ss to racall the form and the use of Simple
Present tense.


Form:


S + v(s/es) + O


S + do/does + not + v(inf) + O


Do/ Does + S + v(inf) + O? Yes, S + do/does
No, S + do/does + not.


<i>(Do not = don’t ; Does not = doesn’t)</i>


Use:expressing the actions what happen everyday
or regularly.


T.askst Ss make some example sentenceso
illustrate the tense.


Put the verbs in the Simple Present Tense


1.Lan (play) ...badminton after school.
2.My brother ( live)...in HaNoi.



3.Thu(listen)...to music every afternoon.
4.My father( get )...up at six every morning.
5.Our school ( have)... a big yard.


6.They ( play)...games every afternoon.
7.We (do)... our homework after class.
8.Your mother (go)... to work by bus.


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs putting the
verbs in Simple Present Tense.


Answer:


1.plays 5.has
2.lives 6.play
3.listens 7.do
4.gets 8.goes
Telling the time:


What time is it?


<i>It is+number+ o’clock.</i>
<i>It is+hour+ minutes</i>


<i>It is+minutes +to/ past+ hour</i>


Example:


He goes to school at seven
o’clock.



He does not go to school at seven
o’clock.


Does He goes to school at seven
o’clock.?


Yes, he does.
No , he doesn’t
Pay much attention


What time is it?
It is eight o’clock.
It is half past six.
It is four fifteen
It is fifteen to five.


What time do you get up?


What time do you go to school?
What time do classes


What time do classes end?
What time do you go to bed?
What time do you have lunch?
Do you help your Mom


Do you go to the store?


How is he?



Where does he live?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<i>(Half past = 30 minutes ; Fifteen = a quarter )</i>


Wring the time:


a. 7.00………
b. 7.25………
c. 7.15………
d. 7.30………
e. 7. 40………
f. 7.47………


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs telling the time.
Answer:


a.It’s seven o’clock.


b.It’s sevent twenty-five./It’s twenty past seven.
c.It’s senven fifteen./It’s a quarter past seven.
d. It’s seven thirty./It’s half past seven.


e.It’s seven forty./It’s twenty to eight.
f. It’s seven forty-seven./It’s thirteen sven.


Retell the main content
Copy


<b>IV.Consolidation:(involved)</b>



<b>VI. Homework: - Revise the studied knowledge for the next class.</b>


Date: 26.12.2009


Period : 52

<b> REVISION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some grammartical </b>
points for the fist term test.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>”ToBe”, Simple Present Tense…


<b> II.Skills: Speaking and writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>I.Presentation:a) Present Progressive tense</b>


Ex : He is riding his bike.
She is walking to the market
Form:


S + is/ are/am +(not)+ V(ing) + O
Is/ Are + S + V(ing) + O ?


Yes, S + is/ are /am./No, S + is /are/am + not.
Use: Express the actions which are happening at


present.


Adverb:At this time, at present, at the moment, now,
right now…


<b>III.Practice:Put the verb into the correct tense:</b>
a. He …….(play) volleyball now.


b. They………(walk) to school everyday.
c. She ………….(travel) to work by plane.
d. He …………(play) soccer at this time.
e. We………(watch) television after school.
Answer:


a.is playing
b.walks
c.travels
d.is playing
e.watch


Make questions using the underlined words or
phreases:


a. He is fine.


………?
b.He lives in Hai Lang town.


………?
c.We have English on Friday.



………?
d.She has breakfast at six o’clock.


………?
T. asks Ss to work ind., then in pairs.


Answer:
a.How is he?


b.Where does he live?


c.What do you have on Friday?


f. d.What time does she have breakfast?
Rewrite the following sentences:


1. My father doesn't smoke any more.


My father used...
2. " I'm waiting for my parents now."


Peter said...


Ss recall the form of the Present
Progressive Tense.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups putting the verbs into the
correct forms.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
3. Mom told me that she was sad then.


Mom said to me: "...”
4.We began to study English five years ago.


We have...
5.They are hard workers.


They ...
6.The last time I met him was last Christmas.( since )
...
7.I walked to school in ten minutes.


It took...
Answer:


1.My father used to smoke.


2.Peter said he was waiting for her parents.
3.Mom said to me: "I am sad now”


4.We have studied English for 5 years.
5.They work hard.


6.I haven't met him since last Christmas.
7.It took me ten minutes to walk to schhol.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in


groups rewrite the sentences.


<b>IV.Consolidation:(involved)</b>


<b>V. Homework: - Revise the studied knowledge for the first term test.</b>


Date: 27.12.2009


Period : 53

<b> REVISION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to revise some grammartical </b>
points for the fist term test.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>”ToBe”, Simple Present Tense…


<b> II.Skills: Speaking and writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
watch T.V walk to school


play games



play soccer trees


T.asks Ss to work in groups of five with the game.
II. Practice:


Odd one out :


1. a. near b. read c. teacher
2. a. right b. opposite c. city
3. a. movie b. hotel c. old
4. a. behind b. police c. children


5. a. temple b. museum c. restaurant
6. a. mountain b. house c. country


7. a. paddy b. game c. day
8. a. late b. lake c. small


Answer:


1 - a ; 2 - c ; 3 - c ; 4 - a ; 5 - b ; 6 - c ; 7 - a ; 8 - c
Build up complete sentences using given words and
phrases:


1. a quarter / my father / bed / to / to / at / goes / eleven.
………...
2. a / is / Lan’s / garden / there / big / house / behind.
………...
3. any / street / there / the / aren’t / on / trees.



………...
4. many / there / house / clocks / how / her / in / are?
………...
Answer:


1. My father goes to bed at a quarter to elevent.
2.There is a big gardent behind Lan’s house.
3.There aren’t any tall trees on the streets.
4.How many clocks are there in her house?
Put the verbs in the Simple Present Tense


1.Bao (play) ...badminton after school.
2.My sister ( live)...in HaNoi.


3.Hoa(listen)...to music every afternoon.
4.My mother( get )...up at six every morning.
5.Our house ( have)... a big yard.


6.We( play)...games every afternoon.


7.Thu and Phong (do)... our homework after


Ss work in groups of five with the
game.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups odding one out.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups putting the given words or


phrases for good sentences.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
class.


8.His mother (go)... to work by bus.


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs putting the verbs in
Simple Present Tense.


Answer:


1.plays 5.has
2.lives 6.play
3.listens 7.do
4.gets 8.goes
Gap fill:


Nam ……….... twelve years old. He lives in a………..
with his family. His house is next……..a bookstore. In
the neighborhood, there……..a hospital, a factory and
a market. Nam’s father …………in the hospital. Nam
goes to school at six fifteen. Classes start ……….seven
and end eleven fifteen.


T.runs through and then asks Ss to work ind. in pairs
-groups.


Answer:
1. is


2. house
3. to
4. is
5. works
6. at


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups filling in the gaps with
suitable words.


<b>IV.Consolidation:(involved)</b>


<b>V. Homework: - Revise the studied knowledge for the first Terminal Test.</b>
Date:14.1.2010


Period:55

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>



<i> Lesson 1: A 1-2( P. 96-97)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about parts of the </b>
body.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>Nouns to talk about the parts of the body


<b> II.Skills: Listening and Speaking</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>



<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a head (visual)


a chest (visual)
houlders (visual)
arms (visual)
hands (visual)
legs (visual)
fingers (visual)
toes (visual)
a foot / feet(visual)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R.O.R


Presentation Text: A2 (P.96)


T. asks Ss to look at the picture and listen to the tape
about the parts of the body.


<b>II. Practice: Simon Says: </b>
Simon says touch your head
Simon says touch your chest
Simon says touch your feet
Simon says touch your shoulders


Simon says touch your legs
Simon says touch your head
Simon says touch your left hand
Simon says touch your right hand
Simon says touch your toes


Simon says touch your left foot
Simon says touch your right foot
Simon says touch your right shoulder
Simon says touch your left shoulder
Picture Drill: A1 + 2 (P.96)


T.runs and models, then asks Ss to work in pairs.
Example Exchange:


S1: What's this?
S2: This is his head.
S1: What are these?
S2: These are his toes.


T. calls some Ss to stand up and practice asking and
answering about the parts of the body in front of the
class- T. gives the feedback.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress –
meaning and copy into the notebook.


Ss listen to the tape.



Ss work with the whole class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 1 P.83 (in workbook)</b>


Ind.,T.asks Ss to write the name of each parts of the body.
Example a) head


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise “What is…? It’s a(n)…” and “What are…?They are….”
- Complete exercise 1 P.83 into the notebook


- Prepare Unit 9: THE BODY (A3-5 P.97-98) for the next class


<i> ( Adjectives to describe the Physical Apearance)</i>


Date:14.1.2010


Period:56

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>



<i> Lesson 2: A3-5 (P. 96-97)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe Physical</b>
Appearance.


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>Adjectives for appearance description



<b> II.Skills: Listening and Speaking</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 1 P. 83 (in workbook)</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
tall ≠ short(adj) (antonym)


thin ≠ fat(adj) (antonym)
heavy ≠ light(adj) (antonym)
strong ≠ weak(adj) (antonym)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Noughts and Crosses.


Example: She / tall


She is tall/ (She is a tall girl.)
she / tall he / big Peter / fat
Mary / small she / thin Ha / short
country / quiet box / light bag / heavy
T.asks Ss to work in two groups with the game.
<b>II. Practice:</b>


T / F Repetition Drill: A 4 P.98


Picture a)She's tall.(repeat)


She's thin.(repeat)
Picture b)He's thin.(silent)


He's short.(repeat)


Picture c)He's small.(silent). He's tall. (repeat)
He's heavy. (repeat)


Picture d)She's thin.(silent) She's tall. (silent)
She's fat (repeat)


<b>III.Further Practice: Listening</b>
Predict: A4 P.98


Tall? Short ? Fat ? Listen


a thin, tall (4)


b short, fat (3)


c tall, fat (2)


d short, fat (1)


T. asks Ss to predict filling in the adjectives for the
people in the pictures a) to d).


Ss aswer T’s vocab


elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress–meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in two groups with the
game.


Ss with the whole class with the
T/F Repetition Drill .


Ss work ind.-then in pairs and in
groups to predict filling in the
adjectives for the people in the
pictures a) to d).And then write the
numbers of the pictures.


(




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T. asks Ss to listen and rite the order(1,2,3,4) of the


people describe.


IV.Consolidation: Exercise 3 P.84 (in workbook)


Ind.,then in pairs,T.asks Ss to describe the people in the pictures.
Example a) Trang is tall.



<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Complete exercise 3 P.84into the notebook


- Prepare Unit 9: THE BODY (B1 P.100 for the next class


<i> ( Face vocab)</i>


Date:16.1.2010


Period:57

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>



<i> Lesson 3: B1 (P.100)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe faces.</b>
<b> I.Knowledge:</b>face vocab


<b> II.Skills:Speaking</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 3 P.84 (in workbook)</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>I. </b>

<b>Revision</b>

<b>: </b>

Pelmanism



fat

tall

heavy big

Noisy



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>

thin

short

light

small

Quiet



<b>II. Presentation : </b>


Vocabulary :
eye (n) (picture)


ear (n) (picture)
lip (n) (picture)
teeth (n) (picture)
hair (n) (picture)
nose (n) (picture)
mouth (n) (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R .O . R


<b>III. Practice : Word Square</b>


H A I R X F


N E F A T I


E O Y F E N


A B S E E G



R T H E T E


M O U T H R


H E A V Y S


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
with the game.


hair , fat , see , the , mouth , out , heavy
ear, arm, near , toe, to, feet, teeth , fingers
nose ,eye


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress –
meaning and copy into the notebook.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups with the game.


IV.Consolidation: Exercise 1 P.85 (in workbook)


Ind.,then in pairs,T.asks Ss to label the parts of the face.
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Complete exercise 1 P.85 into the notebook



- Prepare Unit 9: THE BODY (B2-3 P.101) for the next class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Date:14.1.2010


Period:58

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>



<i> Lesson 4: B2-3 (P.101)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe the features.</b>
<b> I.Knowledge:Adjectives of colour </b>


<b> II.Skills: Listening and Speaking</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
- cefa = face


- spli = lips
- sone = nose


- dreshouls = shoulders
<b>II.Presentation:</b>



Pre-Teach: COLORS


black (adj) (picture)


white (adj) (picture)
gray/grey(BE) (adj) (picture)


red (adj) (picture)
orange (adj) (picture)
yellow (adj) (picture)
green (adj) (picture)
blue (adj) (picture)
brown (adj) (picture)
purple (adj) (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Slap the board


FINDING FRIENDS:


She has… eyes hair lips teeth


black (P)


brown (P) (P)


grey (P) (P)



white (P) (P)


red (P)


yellow (P)


green (P)


blue (P)


T. asks Ss to work in groups of five or six.
T.asks Ss to make sentences:


Example:


She has brown hair.
She has grey eyes…
T. sets the scene.


Dialogue Build:
Mai: I have a new doll.


Lan: What color is her hair ?
Mai: It's black


Lan: What color are her eyes ?


Ss play games with the whole
class.



Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work in groups of five or six.


Ss make sentences using the in
formation in the table.


(




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Mai: They are brown


<b>III.Pactice:Picture Cue Drill: B3 P.101(4 dolls)</b>
Lan: What color is her hair ?


Mai: It's black.


Lan: What color are her eyes ?
Mai: They are brown.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs.


Ss work in opn-closed pairs
asking and anwering about the
colours of the dolls.



IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.85 (in workbook)


Ind.,then in pairs,T.asks Ss to fill in the blank with suitable word.
Example: a) Nhi has a round face.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Complete exercise 2 P.85 into the notebook.


- Prepare Unit 9: THE BODY (B1;4-6 P.101-102) for the next class


<i> ( Describe People)</i>


Date:18.1.2010


Period:59

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>



<i> Lesson 5: B1, 4-6 (P.101-102)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to further practice in Body </b>
vocabulary to describe people.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>body vocab
<b> II.Skills:Speaking and reading</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Exercise P.85</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Revision: B 6 (P.102-textbbok)</b>


T.asks Ss to work with the whole class with the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>2.Pre-Reading:</b>


Pre-Teach: (B1-P.100) a) - f)
round (adj)


oval (adj) a round /an oval face
full (adj)


thin (adj) full/thin lips
long (adj)


short (adj) long/shor hair


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus ,then
T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: Matching B5 P.102


T. asks Ss to listen and write the number next to the


correct picture.


Answer:


a) 1 ; b) 3 ; c) 2 ; d) 4


(Gap Fill)Prediction: B4 P.101 (picture only)
Miss Chi is <i>small/tall </i>and thin. She has a <i>round</i> face,


<i>short/longblack</i> hair, <i>brown</i> eyes, a <i>big </i>/<i> small</i> nose,


<i>full</i>


<i> </i>/<i> thin </i> lips and small <i>white</i> teeth.


T. asks Ss to work in groups to predict the suitable
adjectives describing Miss Chi..


<b>3.While-reading: B4 P.101</b>


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in groups reading
the text and correct their gap-fill prediction.


Comprehension Questions: B4 P.102 from a) to d)


T. runs through and then asks Ss to work in pairs asking
nad answering the questions.


Answer:



a.Her hair is long.
b.It’s black.


c.They are brown.
d.It’s small.


e.They are thin.


<b>Post-reading: Survey</b>


my partner my mum my dad brothersister


body <i>thin</i>


face <i>round</i>


hair <i>short/black</i>


eyes etc.
nose


T. asks Ss to work in groups fo five or six to ask and
answer filling in the table.


class.


aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into


the notebook.


Ss work in groups of five or
six.


Ss make sentences using the in
formation in the table.


Ss work in opn-closed pairs
asking and anwering about the
colours of the dolls.


(




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Write-It-Up


T. asks Ss to work ind. with the writing using the result
above.


E.g.


My partner is thin.He has short black hair and brown
eyes…


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>


T. asks Ss to read the Write-It-Up in front of the class.
<b>V.Homework:</b>



- Memorize vocab.


- Complete Write-It-Up into the notebook.
- Do exercise 5 P.86(in textbook)


- Prepare Unit 10: THE BODY (A1-2,5 P.104-105) for the next class


<i> ( Adjectives of Physical State)</i>


Date:21.1.2010


Period: 60

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 1:A1-2,5 (P.104-106)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel.</b>
<b> I.Knowledge:Adjectives of Physical State </b>


<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Read the text B4 P.101 (in textbook) and answer the questions</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation: </b>


Pre-Teach: A1 P.104


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
hungry (adj) (translation)


thirsty (adj) (antonym)
hot (adj) (visual)
cold (adj) (example)
tired (adj) (example)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Matching


hot no
hungry lạnh
cold mệt
thirty nóng


tired khát
full đói


T. asks Ss to match the English with the suitable
meaning.


Presentation Text A 1 P.104(in textbook)


T.sets the scene:”Lan and Tuan are coming
home.We will listen to the tape and know how they
feel.” Model sentences:



- How do you feel?
does he


I’m hungry.
He’s


Form: How do/does + S + feel?
S + be(feel) + adj.


Use: Hỏi và trả lời về cảm giác


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<b>2. Practice: Word Cue Drill ( A2 P.105)</b>


HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT


COLD TIRED FULL


T. runs through the given cues and model.
Example Exchange


S1: How do you feel ?
S2: I'm (hungry).


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in


chorus,then answer about the stress –
meaning and copy into the notebook.


Ss work ind., then in pairs matching
the English words with their suitable
meaning.


Ss listen to the text.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy
into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.


Ss work in open-closed pairs.

(




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T. asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs.


Pictures Drill A 5 P.105 from a) to f)
(Pictures only)


Matching ( A 5 P.105)


T.asks Ss to listen and match the names with the
right pictures.


Answer



Phương - b) ; Nhan – a) ; Ba – f) - Hương – d)
<b>3.Further Practice Guessing Game*</b>


nóng lạnh đói


mệt no khát


Example Exchange
S1 : Are you thirsty ?
S2 : No, I’m not.


S1 : Are you…..?etc.
T. asks Ss to work in pairs.


Ind.,then in pairs, Ss listen and match
the names with the right pictures.


Ss work in pairs asking and
answering using the given cues.


<b>IV.Consolidation: (involved)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab.


- Revise talking about how we feel .
- Do exercise 1 P.87(in textbook)


- Prepare Unit 10: Staying Healthy – section A 3-4 (P.105-106)



Date:24.1.2010


Period: 61

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 2:A3-6(P.104-107)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a dialogue and</b>
recognize Polite Offers and Requests with “What would you like?” and “I’d like some /
a…./ to….”


<b> I.Knowledge:Polite Offers and Requests</b>
<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: A3</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a drink (n) (example)


orange juice (n) (picture)
noodles (n) (picture)
(to) want = would like (example)
(to) like (explanation)



T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Predict Dialogue:


Nam: How do you feel?


Lan: I’m…(1)… and …(2)….
Nam: What would you like?


Lan: I’d like some …(3)... What about you?
Nam: I’m…(4)...I’d like some …(5)...


<b>2.While-Reading: A 3 P.105</b>


T. asks Ss to read the text and correct their
Prediction Dialogue.


Answer:


1.hot ; 2. thirsty ; 3.orange juice


4.some noodles ; 5. to sit down ; 6. a drink
Model sentences:


What would you like?
I’d like some orange juice.
a drink.



to sit down.
Form: What would +S+ like?


S+would(‘d)like a/an/some…
to Vinf.
Matching


T. asks Ss to read again and match the key words
to the people.


Answer


hot LAN NAM BA


tired
thirsty
hungry
noodles


a drink/orange
Juice


to sit down


Answer


LAN hot,thirsty, a drink/orange juice



Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the stress – meaning and
copy into the notebook.


Ss read and check their prediction.


Ind.,then in pairs and in groups, Ss read
again and match the key words to the
people.


(




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
NAM hungry,noodle


BA tired, to sit down
Matching


T. asks Ss to listen and match the names with the
right pictures.


Answer


a)-Nhan ; b) - Huong ; c) - Phuong ; d) - Ba
<b>3.Post-Reading Mapped Dialogue</b>


HOA   NAM



.... feel ?


…cold and hungry
.... like ?


.... some noodles
.... thirsty?


... like ?
... orange juice


T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairworks.


Example Exchange:
S1 : How do you feel ?
S2 : I’m cold and hungry
S1 : What would you like ?


S2 : I’d like some noodles. How do you feel?
S1 :etc.


Ss look at the poster for the given cues.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then work
in open-closed pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation: A 6 P.107*(in textbook)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>



- Memorize vocab and revise Polite Offers and Requests.


- Exercise 2 P.87 (in workbook)


- Prepare Unit 10: Staying Healthy – section B 4-5 (P.110-111)
Date:26.1.2010


Period: 62

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 3:B4-5(P.110-111)</i>



<b> A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to learn about uncountable and</b>
plural Food and Drink nouns, Polite Requests: ”I’d like…” and Polite Offers “ What
would you like?”.


<b> I.Knowledge:Polite Offers and Requests</b>
<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: A. 5 P.106(in textbook)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 1*( P.89-in workbook)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab and revise Polite Offers and Requests.



- Revise and memorize Polite Offers and Requests.


- Complete exercise 1( P.89-in workbook) into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 10: Staying Healthy – section B 1-3 (P.108-109)


<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Presentation</b>


Vocabulary:


chicken (picture)
fish (picture)
bread (picture)
beef (picture)
meat (picture)
rice (picture)
fruit (picture)
milk (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: R.O.R B5 (P.111)


T has Ss quiz each other, using the pictures.
Example Exchange:


S1: What’s in (a)?
S2: some meat.



Matching/Grids B5 P.111


a b c d e f g h


Nhan P P


Tuan P P


Huong P P


Mai P P


T.asks Ss to listen and match the names of the
people and with what they would like.


Presentation Dialogue: B4 P. 110


T.asks Ss to listen and reapeat.and then practice
the dialogue with a partner.


Model sentences:


I’d like some chicken/rice/orange juice.
vegetable.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen to
T’s model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the



stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ind. then share in pairs and in groups,
Ss listen and match the names of the
people and with what they would like.


Ss listen to the text.


Ss look at the menu again.And then
work in open-closed pairs asking and
answering about the menu.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>2. Practice Picture Drill: </b>


B4 P.110 (Menu) and B5.P.111 pictures from a) to
f)


T. runs through and models.


Example Exchanges;
S1 : What would you like?
S2 : I’d like some fish.
T. has Ss work in open – closed pairs.
<b>3.Production Change Game</b>


T.gets Ss to work in groups of five or six with the
game.



Example Exchange:
S1: I’d like some fish.


S2: I’d like some fish and some rice.


S3: I’d like some fish,some rice and some meat.
S4: etc……..


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 4 P. 09(in workbook)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Memorize vocab and revise Polite Offers and Requests.


- Exercise A 6 P.107(in workbook)


- Prepare Unit 10: Staying Healthy – section B 1-3 (P.108-109)


Date:28.1.2010


Period: 63

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 4:B1-3(P.108-109)</i>



<b> A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to how to use “Some/Any” </b>
with “There is/are”, Positive, Negative and Yes, No Question to talk about Food and
Drink. I.Knowledge:a/an; some, any
<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>



<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: B4 P.110(in textbook)</b>


T.asks Ss to make Polite Offers and Requests?
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
noodles milk


<i><b> </b></i>Food Drink


<i><b> </b></i>


vegetables orange juice


<b>2. Presentation</b>


Pre-Teach B1 P. 108
an apple (realia/picture)
rice (picture)


water (realia/picture)
food (example)
milk (translation)
meat (picture)
an orange (picture)
a banana (picture)


vegetables (picture/example<i><b>)</b></i>



Checkvocab: Dictation List: a, an, some
T. reads: water, rice, banana, milk, vegetables,
apple , meat, orange, bread, noodles, hot drink,
orange juice, cold drink


Answer


<b>a</b> <b>an</b> <b>some</b>


banana
hot drink
cold drink


apple
orange


rice, water , milk,
vegetable , meat,
noodles, orange
juice ,bread


Presentation Text: B2 P. 109


T. sets the scene asks Ss to listen the dialogue
between Puong and Thu.


-T give model sentences and explains “ some /
any”


Comprehension Questions



T.runs through and then asks Ss to work in pairs
using the ( P) what’s for lunch on the list and


answer the questions.


meat ( P)


rice ( P)


noodles
fruit ( P)


Write on the board


Listen and repeat


- Repeat after teacher.
Listen and copy down.


- Repeat (chorus) then work in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
water ( P)


milk


Model sentences
There’s some rice.



There are some apples.


Is there any rice?
Are there any apples?


There isn’t any rice.
There aren’t any apples.
Concept check: Some(+) ; any(?),(-)
<b>3.Practice: Picture Drill (B1.P.108)</b>


T. asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs, using
“Some/Any” with There is/There are, positive,
negative and Y/N questions to talk about Food and
Drink.


Example Exchange


Is there any (water) ?-Yes.There is some water.
Are there any (apples)?Yes.There are some apples.


Ss practice in open-closed pairs.


Ss look at the pictures on B3 then ask
answer using “some/Any” in pairs.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Exercise 2 P.89(in workbook)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>



- Memorize vocab and revise “Some/Any”.


- Complete exercise 2 P.89(in workbook) into the notebook.
- Prepare Unit 10: Staying Healthy – section C1-5 (P.112-113)
<i>(Do you like…? v.s Would you like…?)</i>


Date:7.2.2010


Period: 64

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 5:C1-5(P.112-113)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to how speak about favorite </b>
Food and Drink to contrast “Would you like…?” with “Do you like…?:


<b> I.Knowledge: Offers and Requests</b>
<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: B1 P.108(in textbook)</b>


T.asks Ss to make Polite Offers and Requests?
<b> III.New lesson: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<b>1. Presentation</b>


1. Pre-teach C 1 P.112 and C 3 P.113
favorite (adj) (explanation)



carrot (n) (picture)
tomato (n) (picture)
lettuce (n) (picture)
potato (n) (picture)
bean (n) (picture)
pea (n) (picture)
cabbage (n) (picture)
onion (n) (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Picture Drill C1(P.112-textbook)


Example Exchange :
S1: What are these ?


S2 : They are beans. What are those?
S1: They’re carrots.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
using the pictures.


Rub out and Remember Dialogue
C2(P.112-textbook)


Model Sentences
- Do you like vegetables?
Yes, I do / No, I don’t



- Would you like some vegetables?
Yes, I would / Yes, please.


No, I wouldn’t / No, thanks.
<b>2.Practice Word Cue Drill</b>


beans peas carrots milk


iced tea oranges rice apple<sub>juice</sub>
Word Example Exchange


S1 : Do you like beans) ?
S2 : Yes, I do


S1 : Would you like some beans) now ?
S2 : No, thanks ! / Yes, please.


<b>3.Production Survey </b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups, ask and answer each
other about their favorite food and drink filling in
the table.


E.g


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the stress –
meaning and copy into the notebook.



Ss work in pairs asking and
answering using the pictures.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy
into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

S1 : Do you like chicken ? etc…




Name likes doesn’t like


Nam <i><sub>orange juice</sub>chicken</i> <i>fish</i>
Thuy


T. asks Ss to write about their partner’s preference
using the information in the box.


Example Feedback Cue Drill


Nam likes and orange juice but he doesn’t like
fish…….


Ss work in groups, ask and answer
each other about their favorite food
and drink filling in the table.


<b>V. Consolidation Exercise 1 P.91</b>


<b>VI. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Revise “Would you like…?” with “Do you like…? takling about Food and Drink
preference.


-Complete exercise 1 P.91(in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 11: Staying Healthy – section A1(P.114-115)
<i>(Quantifiers and Containers)</i>


Date:10.2.2010


Period: 65

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 1:A1(P.114-115)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about things people </b>
buy at the store.


<b> I.Knowledge:Quantifiers ( a kilo of…) and Containers(a bottle of…) </b>
<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: C3 P.113(in textbook)</b>


T.asks Ss to make Offers and Requests?
<b> III.New lesson: </b>



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Vocabulary:


some eggs
chocolates
some oil


beef
soap
toothpaste


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Rub Out and Remember


Matching


A bottle of…… 1 một tá…
A packet of…... 1 thỏi, bánh…
A box of ….…. 1 hộp…
A kilo of…..…. 1 lon,hộp…
A gram of…..… 1 gam…
A can of …..… 1 ống tuýp…
A dozen ….…. 1 chai…
A bar of……... 1 gói…
A tube of toothpaste 1 cân…



T. asks Ss to match the Quantifiers or Containers
with suitable ones in Vietnamese.


2. Practice


<b> Rub Out and Remember Dialogue A1a)-P114</b>
S1: Can I help you ?


S2: Yes. A packet of tea please.
S1: Here you are.


S2: Thank you.


T. asks Ss to work with the whole class with the
R.O.R dialogue.


Picture Drill A1 b) P.115


Example Exchange (as A1a)-P114)
Substitution Drill


T. says: water oil, soap, peas, beans, cake ...
Ss say: I'd like a bottle of (water), please.


I'd like abar of (soap), please.
etc……


<b>3.Production Pelmanism*</b>


a bar of soap



a box of chocolates


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss match the Quantifiers or
Containers with suitable ones in
Vietnamese.


.


Ss work with the whole class with the
R.O.R dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


a can of 7 Up


a packets of tea


a dozen eggs


500 grams of chicken
a bottles of water



a tube of toothpaste


T. asks Ss to work in two groups with the game. <sub>Ss work in pairs or in groups with the</sub>
game.


<b>V. Consolidation Exercise 1 P.93</b>
<b>VI. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Revise Quantifiers ( a kilo of…) and Containers(a bottle of…)
-Complete exercise 1 P.93(in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 11: Staying Healthy – section A2-4(P.116-117)
<i>(Quantitiers for food shoping)</i>




Date:14.2.2010


Period: 66

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 2:A2-4(P.116-117)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to listen for specific </b>
information about quantitiers for food shopping.


<b> I.Knowledge:Quantitiers and use "How much ...? / How many... ? with "want" or </b>
"need"


<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: C3 P.113(in textbook)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-Listening </b>


Pre-Teach:


(to) need (translation)
(to) want (translation)
How much? (uncountable)
How many? (countable)
cookies (n)


half(a kilo)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R.O.R


Predict Dialogue A2 (P116-textbook)


T. sets the scene:”Ba is going shopping. We're
going to listen to a dialogue between Ba and
salesgirl”


Predict Dialogue



Sales girl : Can I help you ?


Ba : Yes, I’d like some (1)____, please
Sales girl : How much do you want ?


Ba : (2) ___grams, please.
Sales girl : Is there anything else?
Ba : Yes, I need some (3)___
Sales girl : How many do you want ?
Ba : (4) ___ please.


Guess
1
2
3
4.


Listen
1. beef
2. 200
3. eggs
4. a dozen
<b>2.While-Listening A2 P.116</b>


T.asks Ss to listen and check their prediction.
Comprehension Questions A2 a) – d) P.116
Answer


a) He is at a store.
b)He wants some beef.



c)He wants two hundred grams of beef.
d)He wants a dozen eggs.


A3 P.117


<i>Phuong d</i>


<i>Dung</i> <i>e,a</i>


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups predict the missing words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>Mai</i> <i>b</i>


<i>Nam</i> <i>c</i>


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs, listening to the
tape and fill in the table with a) to b)etc.


Open Prediction A4 P.117



T. has Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and predict the
missing information in the dialogue.


<i>Guess</i> <i>Listen(Answer key)</i>


1.
2.
3.
4.


1.(a bottle of)cooking oil
2.(some)(2 kilos of) rice
3.(1/2 a kilo of) beef
4.(12)(a dozen) oranges
T asks Ss to listen to the tape and correct their
prediction ind.,then in pairs and in groups.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs, listening to
the tape and fill in the table with a) to
b)etc.


Ss to work ind.,then in pairs predict
the missing information in the
dialogue and then listen and check
their prediction.


<b>V. Consolidation Exercise 1 P.93</b>
<b>VI. Homework.</b>



-Memorize vocab


-Revise Quantifiers ( a kilo of…) and Containers(a bottle of…)
-Complete exercise 1 P.93(in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 11: Staying Healthy – section A2-4(P.116-117)
<i>(Quantitiers for food shoping)</i>




Date:18.2.2010


Period: 67

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 3:A2(P.116)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “How much…?”and </b>
“How many…?” with “want” and”need” to talk about quantitiers for shopping.


<b> I.Knowledge:Quantitiers and use "How much ...? / How many... ? with "want" or </b>
"need"


<b> II.Skills:Speaking </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 1 P.93</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T.reads: oranges, meat,


bananas, milk, oil,
bread,


carrots, chocolates,
beef, chicken, rice,
eggs, apples, soap.
<b>2.Presentation</b>


Presentation Dialogue A2 P.116
Model sentences


I need some beef. I need some eggs.
want want


How much do you want? How many do you want?
need? need?
T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<b>2.Practice Blackboard Drill</b>


<i>SHOPPING LIST</i>
<i>300g. beef</i>
<i>1kg. rice</i>
<i>500g. bean</i>


<i>6 apples</i>
<i>1 doz.eggs</i>
<i>2 bottles milk</i>
<i>3 packets noodles</i>


T.runs through the shopping list and models.
Example Exchange


S1: I need some (beef).


S2: How(much) do you want?
S1: (Three hundred grams),please.
S1: I need some (apples).


S2: How many do you want?
S2: (Six),please.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs,ask and answer using “How
much” or “How many”.


<b>3.Production Roleplay</b>


Storekeeper Customer


<i>Can I help you?</i>
<i>How much/How</i>


<i>many…?</i>


<i>I want \/need…..</i>


<i>I’d like…</i>
<i>Do you have</i>


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs
and in groups lisnening to T. and
make a list depending on
countable or uncountable nouns.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy
into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>Anything else?</i>
<i>That’s…</i>
<i>dong,please.</i>


<i>any…,please?</i>
<i>…Thank you!</i>


T. asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs with the
roleplay.


Ss work in open-closed pairs with
the roleplay.


<b>V. Consolidation Exercise 4 P.94</b>


<b>VI. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Revise Quantifiers ( a kilo of…) and Containers(a bottle of…)
-Complete exercise 5 P.94(in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 11: Staying Healthy – section B1, 3-4(P.116-117)


<i>(Further practice inOffers and Requests for Food and Drink with “a”,”aan”,”some”)</i>




Date:25.2.2010


Period: 68

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 4:B1,3-4(P.119-120)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to Further practice in Offers </b>
and Requests for Food and Drink .


<b> I.Knowledge: A,An,Some </b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: B3(P.93-textbook) use “How much…?” or “How many…?”</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T. gets Ss to play it in teams, talking it in turns to fill


up the lists on the board ind.,then share in pairs and
in groups.


There’s a ...


<i>-Can of soda</i>
<i>…</i>


There’s some....


<i>-rice</i>
<i>…</i>


There’re some...


<i>-vegetables</i>
<i>…</i>


Matching B4 P.120


T. asks Ss to look at the pictures B1 (P119-textbook)
again and then work ind.,then in pairs and in groups
listen and number the pictures.



Answer


a b c d e f g h i j k l


2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8


Word Cue Drill B3 (P120)


1.bread/milk 2.noodles/ water


3. fish/soda 4. beef/vegetables/lemonade
5.rice/ orange juice 6. chicken/iced tea


Example Exchanges


S1: What would you like for(break fast)?


S2: I'd like some(bread) and some(milk).


S1: What would you like for(lunch)?
S2: I'd like some(fish) and some(soda).


Note: an orange juice = a glass of orange juice
a soda = a can of soda


an iced tea = a glass of iced tea


T.has Ss work in open and then closed pairs making
Offers or Requests for the food.



<b>2.Production Chain Game*</b>
S1: I'd like some fish


S2: I'd like some fish and some rice and ...


S3: ... some rice and ...


T. asks Ss to work in groups of four or five with the
game.


Ss look at the pictures.And then
play it in teams, talking it in turns
to fill up the lists on the board
ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups.


Ind.,then in pairs and in groups,Ss
listen and match number the
pictures.


Ss work in open and then closed
pairs making Offers or Requests for
the food.


Ss work in groups with the game.


<b>V. Consolidation Exercise 5 P.94</b>
<b>VI. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab



-Revise Quantifiers ( a kilo of…) and Containers(a bottle of…)
-Complete exercise 5 P.94(in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 11: Staying Healthy – section B5-6(P.122-123)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

Date:27.2.2010


Period: 69

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 5:B5-6(P.120)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the prices for</b>
Food and Drink using "How much…..?".


<b> I.Knowledge: “How much …?”to talk about the price</b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: B1(P.113-textbook) male Offers and Requests with “What would…?”</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Revision Bingo* B1 P119(And B4 P.120)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>



<i>bananas, some rice, a glass of orange juice,..</i> and
then asks Ss to work ind. with the game.


<b>2.Presentation </b>


Pre-Teach((and revise)


a hundred (2 hundred…) (example)
a thousand (2 thousand…) (example)
a cake(n) (realia/picture)
an ice – cream(n) (realia/picture)
a sandwich(n) (realia/picture)
fried rice(n) (realia/picture)
a bowl of…


Checking vocab:Slap the board
Presentation Text B 5 P.120
T.asks Ss to listen to the tape.


Model Sentences


- How much is a sandwich ?
It's 1,500 dong.


- How much are vegetables ?
They are 2,000 dong.


Concept check: How much is/are+S?
S+is/are+price



Use: Hỏi và trả lời về giá


<b>3.Practice: Noughts and Crosses</b>


2,500 d 500 d 3,000d


4,800d 10,000d 1,000d


1,200d 8,500d 5,000d


T.runs through and asks Ss to work in 2 teams with
the game. Example Exchange


S1: How much is it?
It’s 2,500dong.
Answer Given B5 P.120


2,500 ; 3,000 ; 1,500 ; 500 ; 1,800 ; 1,000 ; 2,000


Ss choose 4 out of the 120
words.And then work ind. with the
game.


Ss aswer T’s vocab elicitation-listen
to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.



Ss work in two groups.
Ss listen to the tape.


Ss work the whole class with the
given numbers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
T. asks Ss to work in pairs, ask and answer the


questions using the given numbers and the Menu
Example Exchange


2,500 S1: How much is a fried rice?
It’s 2,500dong.


<b>4.Production Survey </b>


Iterms How much is it?


<i>a fried rice</i>
<i>a school bag</i>
<i>a bottle of water</i>
<i>a pencil</i>


<i>Tieng Anh 6</i>
<i>a can of coke</i>


T. gets Ss to work in groups to fill in the survey to
REAL prices they know, not the prices in the
textbook.



Ss work in pairs to ask and answer
about the prices using the number and
the MENU


Groupwork


<b>V. Consolidation Exercise 5 P.94</b>
<b>VI. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Revise Quantifiers ( a kilo of…) and Containers(a bottle of…)
-Complete exercise 5 P.94(in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 11: Staying Healthy – section B5-6(P.122-123)


<i> (“How much …?”to talk about the price)</i>


Date:28.2.2010


Period: 70

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11</b>

<b>: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<i> Lesson 6:Grammar Practice(P.122-123)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to Further practice in Like and</b>
Dislike,Countability, Adjectives, Question Words, Present Simple vs. Present Progressive
Tense, Quantifiers.


<b> I.Knowledge: Present Simple and Present Progressive Tense</b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>



<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: B1(P.113-textbook) male Offers and Requests with “What would…?”</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


1.LIKES AND DISLIKES(Simple Present)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


Find some one who Name


<i>... likes fish</i>


<i>... doesn't like bread</i>
<i>... likes chicken</i>
<i>... doesn't like rice</i>
<i>...likes milk</i>


<i>... likes meat</i>


<i>Lan</i>
<i>Nam</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>



Write-It-Up*


Example Nam likes fish.


A,AN,SOME Grammar Practice 1P.122
Networks


A


<i>sandwich</i>
<i>banana</i>


AN


<i>orange</i>
<i>apple</i>


SOME


<i>noodles</i>
<i>fish</i>


T. asks Ss to fill in the table with words according to a, an,
some ind.


Guessing Game Example
I’d like……….
S1: Would you like a sandwich ?


S2: No, I wouldn't.



S1: Would you like some milk ?


S2: Yes, I would.


ADJECTIVES: (Grammar Practice 1P.122)
Pelmanism


tall long hot fat heavy weak


short short cold thin light strong
T.asks Ss to work in two groups with the game.


QUESTION WORDS Grammar Practice 4 P.123
a-Who ; b-What ; c-How much ; d-What ; e - Where


PRESENT SIMPLE AND PRESENT PROGRESSIVE


game.


Ss work ind. with the writing
using the information from the
table.


Individually, Ss fill in the table
with words according to a, an,
some.


Ss work in groups asking and
answering “A.An,Some”.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a)She is eating an apple now.


b)They are drinking some juice at the moment.
c)He is riding his bicycle.


d)He is going to bed now.


QUANTIFIERS: Lucky Numbers


1.What does cooking oil come in? 7.What does iced tea come in?
2.What does tea come in? 8.What do chcolates come in?
3.What does soap come in? 9.What do noodles come in?
4.LUCKY NUMBER 10.What does water come in?
5.What does soda come in? 11.LUCKY NUMBER


6.LUCKY NUMBER 12.What does toothpaste come in?


T.asks Ss to work in two teams with the game.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs with
the Present Simple Tense and
Present Progressive Tense.


Ss work in two teams with the
game Lucky Numbers.


<b>VI. Consolidation (involved)</b>
<b>V. Homework.</b>



-Revise Present Simple Tense and Present Progressive Tense.
- Prepare well for One-Period Test.


(Present Simple Tense and Present Progressive Tense;Like and Dislike,Countability, Adjectives,….)


Date:3.3.2010


Period: 71

<b> </b>

<b>ONE-PERIOD TEST</b>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be tested some knowledge</b>
from unit 9 to 11For grade.


<b> I.Knowledge:Present Simple, Present Progressive Tense, Like and</b>
Dislike,Countability, Adjectives, Question Words, Quantifiers.


<b> II.Skills: Writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Handing out the papers:</b>


<b> III.Testing: </b>
QUESTIONS:


<i>A.Chọn a,b,c hoặc d để hoàn thành những câu sau:</i>


1.What ….your favorite food?


A. do B. is C . are D. does


2.How …...bananas do you need?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

3. Lan is very hungry. She wants some……..


A. ice- cream B . coffee C. noodles D. lemonade
4. ...color is her hair?


A. When B. What C. Who D. How
5. ……..are they ?- They are 5000dong.


A Who B . How C. What D. How much
6. I am... . I ‘d like some water.


A. hungry B. thirsty C.cold D.fullA
7...do you feel?


A. How B. When C. What D. Who
8. Is there ... bananas?


A. some B. a C. an D. any


<i>B.Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc:</i>


1.Lan(play)………..……badminton after school every afternoon.
2. We(travel)………..to work at the moment.


3.Ba And Thu(not/be)……..……in the classroom.
4.Look!Miss Hoa(sing)………


<i>C.Sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh:</i>



1. some / would /bread /like/ I/ milk/ some/ and.


-...
2. am / I/ hungry.


-...
3. does/ she/ How much/ want?


-...
4. help/ you/ Can/ I?


-...


<i>D. Hãy đọc đoạn văn sau rồi viết (T) cho mỗi câu đúng hoặc(F) cho mỗi câu sai.</i>


Quang is a gymnast. He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. His eyes are brown. He
has a round face and thin lips. Quang is having dinner at the moment. He is eating fish,
meat and vegetables for dinner. After dinner he eats bananas. Then drinks orange juice. He
feels full after dinner.


….. 1.Quang is a student. ….. 6.Quang’s face is round and his lips are full.
….. 2.Quang is short and big. ….. 7.Quang is having a bath at the moment.
….. 3. He has short hair. ….. 8.He is eating vegetables.


….. 4. His hair is white. ….. 9. He often has dinner with fish, meat and vegetables.
….. 5. He has brown eyes. ….. 10.Quang feels hungry after dinner.


<b>IV.Handing in the papers</b>
<b>V.Homework</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

Date:5.3.2010


Period: 72

<b>ONE-PERIOD TEST CORRECTION</b>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to be corrected the papers.</b>
<b> I.Knowledge:Tested points.</b>


<b> II.Skills: Writing</b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Handing in the papers:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>A.Chọn a,b,c hoặc d để hoàn thành những câu sau:</i>


Answer
1.B
2.A
3.C
4.B
5.D
6.A
7.A
8.D


<i>B.Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc:</i>



1.plays
2.travels


3.aren’t(arenot)
4.is singing


<i>C.Sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh:</i>


1.I would like some bread and some milk.
2.I’m (am) hungry.


3.How much does she want?
4.Can I help you?


<i>D. Hãy đọc đoạn văn sau rồi viết T cho mỗi câu đúng, F </i>
<i>cho mỗi câu sai</i>.


F 1.Quang is a student.
F 2.Quang is short and big.
T 3. He has short hair.
F 4. His hair is white.
T 5. He has brown eyes.


F 6.Quang’s face is round and his lips are full.
F 7.Quang is having a bath at the moment.
F 8.He is eating vegetables.


T 9. He often has dinner with fish, meat and vegetables.
F 10.Quang feels hungry after dinner.



Ss read the multiple choices
again and then give the answers
and the reasons for their choices.


Ss recall the suitable verb form.


Ss read the passage again and
answer agai the statements are
True or False.


<b>IV.Mark reporting</b>


T. calls out Ss’s name and report the mark.
<b>V.Homework</b>


<b> - Revise all studied knowledge.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Date:7.3.2010


Period: 73

<b>UNIT 12</b>

<b>: SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>



<i> Lesson 1:A1-2(P.124-125)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to Further practice Present</b>
Progressive Tense and Sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing now.


I. Knowledge: Present Progressive Tense
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<b> II.Checking: (No checking)</b>
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Revision Jumbled words</b>
TORPS = Sport
BOLFATOL = Football
BELVALYOLL = Volleyball
MAGE = Game
SUCIM = Music


LIETOSENIV = Television
T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs putting the letters
for good words.


<b>2.Presentation</b>
Pre Teach


(to) swim (picture)
(to) jog (picture)
(to) play badminton (picture)
table tennis (picture)
(to) skip (mine)
(to) do aerobics (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.



Checking vocabulary: Dictation Lists


T. asks Ss to listen and make a list of sports that Must
be two people v.s can be one person.


T. read: swim, jog, aerobics, table tennis, Volleyball,
Football, Tennis


2 people+


<i>Badminton,Table tennis,</i>
<i>Volleyball, Football,</i>


<i>Tennis</i>


1 person


<i>Swim,Jog,Skip,Aerobics</i>


Presentation Dialogue A1(P.124)
<b>3.Practice Pictures Drill A1 (P124)</b>


Example Exchange
S1: What 's he doing ?
S2: He's swimming.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs putting
the letters for good words.


Ss aswer T’s vocab


elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss work ind.,then share in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Form: (What) + is / am /are +S + doing ?


S + is /am / are + V – ing.
T. has Ss to work in pairs.


<b>4.Further practice Noughts And Crosses A1 (P124)</b>


Example Sample
S1: Picture “C”


S2: What are they doing ?
S1: They’re playing soccer.


Further practice in Present
Progressive Tense using the
pictures.


Ss work in two groups.


<b>VI. Consolidation Exercise 1P.103 (in workbook)</b>



Example: Minh and Nhi are playing soccer.
<b>V. Homework.</b>


-Revise Present Progressvive Tense.
-Memorize vocab.


-Complete Exercise 1P.103 (in workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 12: Sports and Pastimes (A3-5P.127-128)
(Simple Present Tense)


Date:10.3.2010


Period: 74

<b>UNIT 12</b>

<b>: SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>



<i> Lesson 2:A3-5(P.127-128)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a short text about </b>
sports, practicing “Which” question with Simple Present Tense to talk about people’s
regular exercise.


I. Knowledge: Present Simple Tense
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: A1 P.124</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<b> III.New lesson: </b>



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Warm up: Jumbled words</b>
TORPS = sport


LIETOSENIV = television
MAGE = game


BELVALYLOL = volleyball
SUCIM = music


BOLFATOL = football


T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs putting the
letters for good words.


<b>2.Pre - reading Open - Prediction</b>


T. sets the scene:’This is Lan and this is Nam. They
are students. They like sports very much. You work
ind.,then in pairs and in groups to predict which
sports Lan and Nam like”.


Lan Nam


1.
2.
3.


1.


2.
3.
<b>3. While reading </b>


Lan Nam


1. swims


2.does aerobics
3.plays badminton


1. plays soccer
2.jogs


3.plays table tennis
T.asks Ss to work ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups reading the text again and check their
prediction.


Lucky number (questions-A4 P.126 a-d)
1)LUCKY NUMBER


2a) Which sports does Lan play?
She plays badminton…
3b) Does Lan play tennis?
No, she doesn't


4c) Which sports does Nam play?
He plays soccer, jogs…



5d) Does Nam play table tennis?
Yes, he does.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs putting
the letters for good words.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups with the Open-Prediction.


Ss read and check their prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
6)LUCKY NUMBER


<b>4.Post - reading (A3 P.125-textbook)</b>
Example Exchange


S1:Which sports do you play?
S2: I (play soccer) and….
T. asks Ss to work in pairs.


Survey


Name Sports


<i>Hoa</i> <i>swim</i> <i>volleyball</i> <i>table - tennis</i>


T.has Ss to work in groups asking and answering
the questions filling in the table.



Example Exchange


S1: Which sports do you do ?


S2 : I swim.


S1: Do you play soccer ?


S2: Yes, I do.


Ss work in open,then closed pairs
with the pictures.


Ss work in groups asking and
answering the questions filling in
the table.


<b>VI. Consolidation Write-It -Up</b>
<b>V. Homework.</b>


-Revise Present Simple Tense.


-Complete Exercise 4 (P.104-workbook) into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 12: Sports and Pastimes (B1-3 P.127-128)


Date:12.3.2010


Period: 75

<b>UNIT 12</b>

<b>: SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>



<i> Lesson 3:B1-3(P.127-128)</i>




<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write texts about what we</b>
do in our free time.


I. Knowledge: Present Simple Tense
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: A1 P.124</b>


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<b>1.Warm up: Gessing Game</b>


<i>I…….in my free time.</i>


T.has Ss to work in groups of four or five with the
Gessing Game


Example Exchange


S1: Do you play soccer in you free time?
S2: No, I don’t.


S1: Do you watch T.V?
S2: No, I don’t.etc.
<b>2. Pre-Writing</b>
Pre-Teach



free time(n): (explanation)
(to) go fishing : (picture)


(to) go to the movies : (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: R & R


Presentation Text B1 P.127(textbook)
T. asks Ss to listen to the tape.


Model sentences:


A: What do you do in your free time?
B: I go fishing in my free time.


Form


A: What do you do in your free time?
they their


does he his
she her
B: I go fishing in my free time.
He goes fishing in his free time
(Transformation) Picture Drill
a) Example



A: What does Phuong do in your free time?
B: He goes to the movies.


T. has Ss to work in pairs with the pictures.
Picture drill ( transformation) (B1-P. 127)
Example : Ss change “I” to “Phuong …” etc
Answer key B3-128 – Listen and read


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook


Rewrite on the board
Read in chorus


Find out the model


Teacher and the whole class
Work in pairs


Write


Write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

a. Phuong goes to the movies in his free time.
b) Ly watches TV in her free time.


c) Nam reads in his free time.



d) Lan listens to music in her free time.
e) Tuan goes fishing in his free time.


f) Long plays video games in his free time.
<b>3.While-Writing Pyramid</b>


T. asks Ss to write 3 things about what they do in
their free time.And then put the sentences together on
g poster in groups.


Example: Individual writing


Lan writes: I watch TV. I go to the park and I play
badminton.


Huy writes: I watch TV. I go fishing and I play
soccer.


Group writing(Poster).


Lan, Huy ,Thinh watch TV.
Huy and Thinh play football
Huy goes fishing.


Lan goes to the park and I plays badminton.
Thinh listens to music


Write



Repeat the main content of the
lesson


Copy


<b>VI. Consolidation Group writing correction</b>
<b>V. Homework.</b>


-Complete the writing into the notebook.
-Exercise 2 P.105(workbook)


-Prepare Unit 12: Sports and Pastimes (B4-5 P.128-129-Some adverbs of frequency)


Date:17.3.2010


Period: 76

<b>UNIT 12</b>

<b>: SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>



<i> Lesson 4:B4-6(P.128-129)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know how to use “ How</b>
often . . .?” questions and answers “ once / twice / three times . . . a week ” to talk about
frequency of activities.


I. Knowledge: Adverbs of frequency
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: B1 P.127</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1. Revision Matching B4 P.128</b>


T. asks Ss to listen and match the names with the
right pictures.


Answer


Tan-f ; Minh and Nam-e ; Lien-a ; Lan and Mai-b
<b>2.Presentation</b>


Pre Teach:


How often? (translation)
once/twice/three times a week (example)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: What and where


Presetation Text B5 P.129


T. asks Ss to listen to the dialogue.
Model sentences


<i>- </i>How often does she goes jogging?
She goes jogging once a week.


twice


three times
Form: How often + do / does + S + V ?


S + V (s,es) +…… a (week ...)


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<b>3.Practice Substitution Drill</b>


Cues: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven,one…
Example


T. says: Ss say:
one once a week
two twice a week…..
Picture Drill A5 P.129 Ly’s Diary


T. asks Ss to look at the diary and then asks Ss to
work in pairs asking and answering about it.
Example Exchange


S1: How often does Ly(go to school)?
S2: She goes(six times) a week.


<b>4.Production Find Someone Who</b>


Find Someone Who… Name



Ss work ind.,then share in pairs
with the listening.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook


Ss listen to the tape.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in
chral-ind.-copy into the notebook-answer
T’s questions about concept
check.


Ss work with the whole class
with the drill.


Ss work in open-closed pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>…play football tice a week</i>
<i>…goes to the park once a week</i>
<i>…watches T.V seven times a week</i>
<i>…plays badminton twice a week</i>
<i>…does homework six times a week</i>



T. asks Ss to work in groups with Find Someone Who
Example Exchange


S1: How often do you play soccer?
S2: Once a week.


<b>VI. Consolidation Exercise 4 P.105</b>


Example a) I go to school seven times a week.
<b>V. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab.


-Revise adverbs of frequency.


-Complete Exercise 4 P.105 into the notebook.


-Prepare Unit 12: Sports and Pastimes (C1-5 P.130-133)
(More Adverbs of frequency)


Date:21.3.2010


Period: 77

<b>UNIT 12</b>

<b>: SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>



<i> Lesson 5:C1-5(P.130-133)</i>



<b>A. OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to read a picture story to</b>
understand the details and practice adverbs of frequency (always,
usually, often,sometimes, never ) with the simple present tense for
regular activities.



I. Knowledge: Adverbs of frequency
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: B1 P.127</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Revision Noughts and Crosses</b>


swim read a book play tennis


go to school play football do homework
watch TV listen to music play volleyball
T. asks Ss to work in two groups.


Example Exchange
S1: How often do you swim?
S2: Twice a week.


<b>2.Pre-Reading</b>
Pre-Teach


always/usually/often /sometimes/never (adv) (explanation)
(to) go on a picnic: (explanation)
(to) wear clothes/boots: (picture)
stove (n)

(picture)
overnight (adv) (explanation)

Check vocab:


<b>R.O.R-3.While-Reading Grids</b>


How often do they never sometimes often ussally always


<i>…go to the zoo</i> P


<i>…go to the park</i> P


<i>…have a picnic</i> P


<i>…do aerobics</i> P


<i>…do sports</i> P


<i>…fly kites</i>


<i>…go camping</i> P


<i>…walk to school</i> P


<i>…do homework</i> P


Comprehension Questions P133-textbook from a) to f)
T.asks Ss to read and answer the questions in pairs.


Answer


a.He likes walking.



b. They always wears strong boots and warm clothes.
c. He goes on the weekend.


d. He usually goes with two friends.
e. He often goes walking in the mountain.
f. They take food, water and a camping stove.
3.Post-reading

Listen



Answer a.never ; b.sometimes ; c.often ; d.often ; e.usually
Transformation Writing from the text C6 P.132


<i>For weaker Ss</i>: change from “minh” to”I”.


<i>I like walking. On the weekend I often go</i>
<i>walking in the mountains. I usually go with</i>
<i>two friends.My friends and I always wear</i>
<i>strong booths and warm lothes. </i>


Ss work in two teams with
the game.


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to
repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T. reports on the
board-stress-meaning.


Ss read the picture story
again and complete the
grids ind.,then share in


pairs and in groups.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<i>For stronger Ss</i>: change the information and


change”Minh”to “I” and use “networks” for new ideas.


<i>I like…. On the weekend I often…. I usually</i>
<i>….My friends and I always wear … and we</i>
<i>always take…Sometime…</i>


Ss work ind.,then share in
pairs.


<b>VI. Consolidation C4 P.131</b>


Example a) I sometimes go to the zoo.
<b>V. Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab.


-Revise adverbs of frequency.


-Complete C4 P.131 and exercise 2 P.106-107 into the notebook.
-Prepare Unit 13: Activities and Seasons A1(P.134-135)


Date:23.3.2010


Period: 78

<b>UNIT 13</b>

<b>: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS</b>




<i> Lesson 1:A1(P.134-135)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use temperature and seasons</b>
vocabulary with questions "What's the weather like ?".


<b>I. Knowledge: Talking about the weather</b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Read the text and answer the questions?</b>
<b> III.New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

Pre - Teach :


weather (translation)
Seasons (example)
Spring (visual)
Summer (visual)
Fall (visual)
winter (visual)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Checking vocabulary: Matching



cold
cool
warm
hot


spring
summer
Fall
winter


June, july, August,


September, October,


November, December,


January, February, March,
April, May.


Presentation Dialogue A1 P.134
Model sentences


Mary: What is the weather like in the summer ?
Mai: It's hot.


* Concept check: -What is the weather like in…?
It’s+Adj
Use: Hỏi-trả lơi về thời tiết


<b>2.Practice: Picture Drill A1 - P134</b>


Example Exchange


A: What's the weather like in the Summer ?
B: It's hot.


T.asks Ss to work in pairs.


<b>3.Production: Substitution Boxes </b>


<i>rice hot and mountains</i>
<i> green warm river the</i>
<i> night morning yellow is cool</i>
<i>trees blue flowers afternoon</i>


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in
chral-ind.-copy into the notebook-answer
T’s questions about concept
check.


Ss listen to T.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

T.divides the class into 4 groups. Each is for one
season and each group make a poster.


T. models:


<i>1 - In the Spring</i>


The afternoon is warm but the evening is cool.


The rice is green. The trees are beautiful.


<i>2 - In the Summer</i>


The night is hot, the river is warm, the lake is blue,the
flowers are tall.The rice is yellow.


<i>3 - In the Fall</i>


The morning is cool, the evening is beautiful.


<i>4 - In the Winter</i>


The morning is gray and cold,The mountains and the
rivers are very cold.


Ss work in open-closed pairs.


Ss work in groups.


<b>IV.Consolidation Exercise 1 P.108</b>
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab and talking about the weather with’What’s the weather…?”
-Complete exercise 1.P108 into then notebook


-Prepare Unit 13:Activities and Seasons A2-3(P.135)
(Talk about your favorite weather)


Date:27.3.2010



Period: 79

<b>UNIT 13</b>

<b>: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS</b>



<i> Lesson 2:A2-3(P.135)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “What weather do you</b>
like?” to talk about your favorite weather and contrast it with “What’s the weather like?”
<b>I. Knowledge: What weather do you like?</b>


<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: A1 P. 134</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Warm up: Word square:</b>


F A L L C O L D


X W A R M N S S


G N I R P S U E


O N L N I O M A


T H S T T S M S


C O O L K E E O



W E A T H E R N


T. has Ss to work in two teams with the game.
<b>2.Presentation</b>


Model sentences:
A: What weather do you like?
B: I like hot weather.


A: What weather does she like?
B: She likes cool weather.


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


Form: What weather + do/ does + S + like ?
S + like (s) + adjective+ weather
<b>3.Practice: Picture Drill (A3-P135)</b>


Example Exchange:


S1: What weather do you/they) like?
S2: I /They(like cool) weather.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about
the weather they like.


<b>IV. Further Practice: Mapped Dialogue</b>
CAN THO HANOI


…Hanoi?


…cold.
……hot!


.…like?
…cold…


.…Hanoi!
.…like?


.…hot..
….Can Tho!


T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairwork.


Example Exchange:
S1: What’s the weather like in Ha Noi?


S2: It’s cold. What’s the weather like in Nha Trang?


Ss work in groups of four to
With the games.


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in
chral-ind.-copy into the notebook-answer
T’s questions about concept
check.



Ss work in open-closed pairs
with their favorite weathear.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
S1: It’s hot.


S2: What weather do you like?
S1: I like cold weather.


S2: Come to Ha Noi.


S1: What weather do you like?
S2: I like hot weather.


S1: Come to Nha Trang.


<b>IV.Consolidation Exercise 3 P.109</b>
Example: He likes hot weather.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Memorize talking about favorite weather with”What weather do/does+…+like?”.
-Complete exercise 3.P109 into then notebook.


-Prepare Unit 13:Activities and Seasons A4-5(P.136)


Date:28.3.2010



Period: 80

<b>UNIT 13</b>

<b>: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS</b>



<i> Lesson 3:A 4-5(P.136)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “When” clause in</b>
Positive Statements and “Wh” questions.


<b>I. Knowledge: “Wh”questions</b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 3 P. 109</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Warm up: Networks</b>


watch T.V


Pastimes


go fishing go camping


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in groups.
Possible answer


go fishing go for a walk go camping
go jogging listen to music watch TV
read books fly kites ...


Prediction:


What does Ba do when it’s...?
a)hot? <i>e.g. He goes fishing.</i>


b)cold ?
c)warm?
d)cool?


T. has Ss work ind.,then in groups with the
prediction.


Presentation Text: A 4 P.136


T.has Ss listen the text and then has Ss read the text
again and check their predictions.


Model sentences:


What do you do when it’s hot?
does he


I go swimming.
Goes


T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<b>2.Practice: Word Cue Drill</b>


a. cold / go jogging?
b. cool / do aerobics?
c. hot / go swimming?
d. warm / go to the park/


Example Exchange


S1: When it’s cold, do you go jogging?
S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.


T gets Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
questions using the given cues.


Transformation Writing A4 P.136


T. asks Ss to change the text about Ba and write
about themselves, using “I”.


Ind.,then in groups,Ss fill in the
nets with the words or phrases
about the pastimes.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and in
groups with the predict.


Ss read the text and check their
prediction.


Find out the model



Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in
chral-ind.-copy into the notebook-answer
T’s questions about concept
check.


Ss work in open-closed pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Ex: When it’s hot, I ...


When...


T. asks Ss to swap books, read their partner’s text,
then write about their partner.(using “He/She…”)
Ex: When it’s hot, he/she ...


and in groups with the
transformation writing.


<b>IV.Consolidation Exercise 4 P.110</b>
Example: When it’s cold, I go jogging.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Memorize using “When” clause in Positive Statements and “Wh” questions.
-Complete exercise 4 P.110 into then notebook.


-Prepare Unit 13:Activities and Seasons B1(P.138-139)



Date:29.3.2010


Period: 81

<b>UNIT 13</b>

<b>: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS</b>



<i> Lesson 4:B1(P.138-139)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to further practice in Adverbs </b>
of Frequency, Simple Present, Sports Vocabulary and Seasons.


<b>I. Knowledge: Adverbs of Frequency and Simple Present</b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 4 P. 110</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Revision Matching</b>


PP PPPP PPP PPPPP 


always usually often sometimes never
T. asks Ss to match the Averbs fo Frequency with the
symbols ind.,then in pairs.


<b>2.Presentation:</b>
Pre-Teach:



(to) play basketball (visual)
(to) go sailing (visual)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Presentation Text B1 P.138


T. asks Ss to listen to the text and then practice
speaking with their patners.


<b>3.Practice Answer Given</b>
a.we often play volleyball.
b.They sometimes go sailling.
c.I often go swimming.


d.She usually plays babminton.
e.We always play basketball.


Eg: a - What do you often do in the spring ?


T. asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs with the Answer
given.


Answer


a.What do they do in the spring?
b.What do they do in the fall?
c.What do you do in the summer?
d.What does she do in the fall?
e.What do you do in the winter?



Word Cue Drill T. asks Ss to use the questions from
“Answer Given” to practice in pairs from a) to e) in


Ss go to the board and match the
given adverbs with suitable
symbols.


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Listen and repeat


Teacher and the whole class


Work in pairs


make the questions for the
answer. (work in pairs)


Teacher and the whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
pairs. Example Exchange


S1: What do you do in the Spring?
S2: We often play volleyball.


<b>4.Production Lucky number: </b>


T.has Ss work in two groups with the game.
1 - What's the weather like in the winter ?
2 - What do you usually do in the fall ?
3 - What do you usually eat in the winter ?
4 - LUCKY NUMBER.


5 - What's the weather like in the spring ?
6 - LUCKY NUMBER.


7 - Where do you usually go tin the summer
8 - What weather do you like ?


9 - What fruit do you usually eat in the Spring ?
10 - LUCKY NUMBER.


11 - What's the weather like in the fall ?


12 - What / which sports do you in the vointer ?


G1:
G2:


-Repeat the main content of the
lesson


- Copy


<b>IV.Consolidation Exercise 1 P.110-111</b>



Example: He often goes fishing in the Summer.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Adverbs of Frequency, Simple Present, Sports Vocabulary and Seasons.
-Prepare Unit 13:Activities and Seasons B 2(P-139)


Date:31.3.2010


Period: 82

<b>UNIT 13</b>

<b>: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS</b>



<i> Lesson 5:B2(P.139)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write activities you do in</b>
different seasons.


<b>I. Knowledge: Adverbs of Frequency and Simple Present</b>
<b> II.Skills: Writing</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 1 P. 110-111</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Pre-Writing: Brainstorm: </b>


Watch T.V go jogging
Activities



summer and seasons winter


play in the park go swimming
T.asks Ss to work ind.,then in pairs and in groups filling
in the nets with activities in the seasons.


Board Drill: B 2 P. 139


Example Exchange


S1 : What do you do in the summer ?
S2 : I often play tennis.


T. asks Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about
activities the do in the real seasons.


Survey


Name seasons weather usually go


usually
do


usually
eat/drink


Hoai fall cool the


mountains



go
camping


a picnic
hot drink


T.asks Ss to ask and answer filling in the table in groups
of five or six.


Example Exchange


S1: Which season do you like, Hoai?
S2: Fall.


S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall?
S2: It's cool.


S1: Where do you usually do you go?
S2: To the mountains.


S1: What do you usually do there ?
S2: I go camping with my friends.
S1: What do you usually eat or drink ?


S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks.
<b>2.While-Writing Write-It-Up:</b>


T.asks Ss to write about the friends they have
interviewed, using the 3rd<sub> person sigular.</sub>



Example


Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually
goes camping…..


<b>3.Post-Wwiting Correction</b>


T.asks Ss to swap their writing and correct for each


Ss work ind.,then in pairs and
in groups with the activities
with the seasons.


Ss work in open-closed pairs.


Ss work in groups with the
Survey.


Ss work ind. and write about
the friends using the
information from the table.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
other.


<b>IV.Consolidation Exercise 3(P.113)</b>
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Memorize vocab



-Memorize Adverbs of Frequency and Simple Present.
-Complete exercise 3 P.113 into then notebook.


-Prepare Unit 14:Making Plans A1-3(P.140-141)
(‘Going To’-Future)


Date:2.4.2010


Period: 83

<b>UNIT 14</b>

<b>: MAKING PLANS</b>



<i> Lesson 1:A1-3(P.140-141)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk vacation plans .</b>


<b>I. Knowledge: ’Going to’ Future, Positive Statements and ‘Wh’questions. </b>
<b>II.Skills: Reading and Speaking</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 3(P.113)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation:</b>


Pre -Teach:


summer vacation (n) (translation)
citadel (n) (picture)
(to) stay with (someone)


(to) stay for (a week/a day)
uncle (n) (example)
aunt (n) (example)
(to ) visit (translation)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab: Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140


T. reads the text aloud and asks Ss to order the
studied vocab ind.,then in pairs.


Answer keys:


1.the summer vacation
4.(to) stay for ( aweek/a day
6.the citadel
6.my uncle


3.(to) stay with someone
5.my aunt


2.(to) visit


Presentation dialogue: A1 P.140


T.asks Ss to listen to the text the text , then practice
the text with their partner.


Comprehension Questions



T. asks Ss some short questions.(P.141-textbook)
Answer keys:


a.Visit Hue


b.With her aunt and uncle
c.One a week.


d.Visit the citadel.


Model sentences :
What are you going to do ?
I'm going to visit Hue


She's stay for a week.
From: S+is/am/are+Going To+Vinf.


Use:Talking about an action happening in the future
<b>2.Practice: Work Cue Dril</b> l :


a) visit Hue


b) visit the citadel
c) stay in a hotel
d) visit Bach Ma park


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s model-repeat ind.- in
chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Ss order the studied vocab
ind.,then in pairs.


Work in individually to listen to
the text to order vocab


Listen and practice the text
Work in individually
answers questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

e) camp in the mountains
f) stay in a tent


Example Exchange


S1: What are you going do this summer ?
S2: I'm going to visit (Hue).


T. asks Ss to work in open-closed pairs using the
given cues and ‘Going To’Future.


<b>3.Further practice: Find S.O Who </b>
“This summer vacation…:


Find S.O Who’s going to…. Name
…stay at home



…visit an aunt or uncle
... visit a new city


...stay in a hotel


.. camp in the mountais
..stay in a tent


Example Exchange:


S1: This summer vacation, are you going to stay at
home ) ?


S2: Yes,I’m /No,I'm not.


T. asks Ss to work in groups asking nad answering
filling in the table.


Mapped dialogue* A 3 P.141


<b>Work in pairs to answer</b>
<b>following example exchange :</b>


<b>S1: What are you going do this</b>
<b>summer ?</b>


S2: I'm going to visit Hue )


<b>Work in groups to play the game</b>
<b>following example exchange :</b>


<b>S1: This summer vacation , are</b>
<b>you going to stay at home ) ?</b>
S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not


<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


-Memorize ’Going to’ Future, Positive Statements and ‘Wh’questions.
-Prepare Unit 14:Making Plans (A4-5 P.142-143)


Date:3.4.2010


Period: 84

<b>UNIT 14</b>

<b>: MAKING PLANS</b>



<i> Lesson 2:A4-5(P.142-143)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text</b>
and practice ‘’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.
<b> I. Knowledge: ’Going to’ Future</b>


<b> II.Skills: Reading </b>
<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Read the text A1P.140 and answer the questions.</b>
<b> III.New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Pre- reading</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

beach (example)
temple (picture)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.
Check vocab : Matching


Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the
word in the column B


A
Ha Long Bay
Ben Thanh market
The beach


The Citadel
Ngoc Son temple


B
Hue


Nha Trang
HCM City
Quang Ninh
Ha Noi
Ordering :


-T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five
places you’ve matched in the summer vacation



<b>1 2 3 4 5</b>
<b>2. While –reading : A4 - P 142</b>


T. asks Ss to read the text to check their order the
places .


then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one of the
gird below with answer keys


Places to
visit?
Where
to stay?
How
long?
What
to do?
First
Then
Next
After That
finally
Ha Long
Ha Noi
Hue
Nha Trang
HCM


<b>4. Post reading: Transformation writing:</b>



T. asks Ss to rewrite the text on P.142,changing
‘Phuong and Mai’”They” to ‘I’ and replacecing their
vacation plan with the student’s own plans.


listen to T’s model-repeat
ind.-in chorus,then answer about the
stress – meaning and copy into
the notebook.


Work in groups to play this
game


Ss listen and order the places


Ss read the text to check their
order the places.And then fill in
the table.


Ind.,then share in pairs and in
groups,Ss rewrite the text.


<b>IV.Consolidation: Correction</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


-Memorize vocab


-Exercise 3 P.114-115 in workbook
-Revise ’Going to’ Future.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

Date:5.4.2010


Period: 85

<b>UNIT 14</b>

<b>: MAKING PLANS</b>



<i> Lesson 3:B1-4(P.144-145)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk</b>
about plans for the near future.


<b> I. Knowledge: ’Going to’ Future</b>
<b> II.Skills: Reading </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>


<b> II.Checking: Read the text A4P.141 and answer the questions.</b>
<b> III.New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1.Review Finding friends(with answer keys )</b>
Finding friends <i>see a movie</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<i>watch a soccer match</i>
<i>do homework</i>


<i>help my mom</i>
<i>visit my friend</i>
<i>go walking</i>



T.asks Ss to work in groups asking and answering
filling in the table.


Example Exchange:


S1: What are you going to do tomorrow,Nam?
S2: I’m going to (do my homework)


<b>2 Practice: Predict Dialogue:</b>


T. asks Ss to copy the dialogue and fill in the gap
with predicting information ind.,then in pairs.


Tuan:What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I’m going to ...(1)...


Tuan:What are you going to do tomorrow ?
Lan: It’s Sunday .I’m going to ...(2)...
Then we’re going to…(3)...what about you?
Tuan:Tonight,I’m going to ....(4)...


And tomorrow, I’m going to....(5)...


T. asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


Answer B1- P 144
1.do my homework
2.visit my friend


3.see a movie
4.play babminton
5.watch a soccer match


Mapped Dialogue B2- P 144


……... tonight ? ……...see a movie
. . …... tonight ?
…...help my Mom


...tomorrow? …...go walking
...tomorrow?
…....play volleyball


Example Exchange


S1: What are you going to do tonight ?
S2: I’m going to see a movie.


What are you going to do tonight ?
S1: I’m going to help my mom.


What are you going to ?
S2: ect...


to complete the table


following example exchange :


S1: What are you going to do


tomorrow?


S2: I’m going to do my homework


Work in pairs to predict the
dialogue


Ss copy down the dialogue and
Then fill in the gaps in pairs then
practice the dia in pairs


Work in groups to play this game
<b>Example exchange :</b>


S1: On Sunday morning I’m going
to go shopping


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<b>3.Production: Chain Game</b>


T.asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences
in stubs in B4 P.145 and then play the Chain game.


Example Exchange


S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping
S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping
and on Sunday afternoon I’m going watch TV.
<b>IV.Consolidation:</b>


<b>V. Homework:</b>



-Read the text again for details and answer the questions.
-Exercise 1 P.115


-Revise ’Going to’ Future.


-Prepare Unit 14:Making Plans (B5-6 P.145-146)


Date:7.4.2010


Period: 86

<b>UNIT 14</b>

<b>: MAKING PLANS</b>



<i> Lesson 4:B5-6(P.145-146)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading</b>
practice with 'Going To '


<b> I. Knowledge: ’Going to’ Future</b>
<b> II.Skills: Reading </b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: Exercise 1 P.115 </b>


<b> III.New lesson: </b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1.Review: Survey </b>



Tonight On Sat? On Sun? In this Summer<sub>vacation?</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


Partner 1
Partner 2


Example Exchange:


S1: What are you going to do tonight?
S2: I’m going to(read).


<b>2.Pre -reading </b>
Pre -Teach:


camera (n) (picture/ realia)
(to) bring (translation)
(to) take a photo (mime)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in chorus
,then T.reports vocab on the board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: what and where
Pre-Questions:


Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic
1.Where are they going to ?


2.What three things are they going to bring ?
3.What are they going to there?



<b>3.While -Reading :</b>


T. asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction.
Answer:


1.Near a lake


2.A camera, food and drink
3.Take a photos


4.Pre-listening: Brainstorm


A kite warm clothes


Things to bring for
a camping vacation
Predict


Vui a ball
Ly a camera
Lan some food
Mai some drink
Nga a tent
<b>5.While-listening: B6 P.145</b>


T. asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction.
Answer keys:



Vui: a tent ,some food


Ss aswer T’s vocab
elicitation-listen to T’s
model-repeat ind.- in chorus,then
answer about the


stress – meaning and copy
into the notebook.


Ss work in individually to
answer the pre-questions.


Ss read the text again and
check their prediction.


Ss work ind.,then in pairs
with the Brainsorm.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
Ly : a camera


Lan : a ball


Mai and Nga : some drinks
Rewrite-the-sentences*


<b>6.Post-Reading and Listening</b>
(based on B5-6 P.145-146)



2.Name two people who are going to bring food?
3.LN


4.Where is the boy’s picnic going to be?
5.LN


6.Where are the girls going camping?


7.Name two people who are going to bring drinks?
8.What’s lan going to bring?


9.LN


10.Whos going to bring a tent?


11.How many days are the girls going to camp for?
12.LN


to bring .And then work in
pairs to listen to the tape to
check their prediction.


Ss work in two groups with
the game Lucky Number.


IV.Consolidation:
V.Homework:


-Memorize vocab and read the text again for details and answer the questions.
-Exercise 6 P.124-125



-Revise ’Going to’ Future.


-Prepare Unit 14:Making Plans (C1-3 P.147-149)
<b> (Make suggestions with ‘Let’s..’’ and responding…)</b>


Date:10.4.2010


Period: 87

<b>UNIT 14</b>

<b>: MAKING PLANS</b>



<i> Lesson 5:C1-3(P.147-149)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to Make Suggestions with</b>
“Let’s…..’’ and respond, Further Practice in ‘want to…


<b> I. Knowledge: ‘Let’s…..’’ </b>
<b> II.Skills: Speaking</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: -Exercise 6 P.124-125 </b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>


<b>1.Presentation :</b>
Pre -Teach:


by minibus (example)
a pagoda (picture)


too(≠very) (antonym)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

too far (example)


T.elicits-models-asks Ss to repeat ind.,and in
chorus ,then T.reports vocab on the
board-stress-meaning.


Check vocab: R.O.R
Pre-Questions


1.Where are they going to go? <i>(Huong Pogada)</i>


2.How are they going to travel? <i>(by minibus)</i>


Presentation Dialogue C1 P.147


T. asks Ss to listen to the dialogue and then read
the text again and check their prediction.


Answer keys:
1.Huong pagoda
2.By minibus


Comprehension Questions C2 P .148


T.asks Ss to read the text and answer the questions
in pairs.


Answer Keys:



a Nam wants to go to Hue


b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda
c Lan wants to walk


d Because it’s too far
e By bike


f Because it’s too hot


g Ba wants to travel by minibus
Model sentences:


- Let’s go camping.
walk there.


That’s a good idea./No,I dont’ want to
T.elicits the model sentences-T.models-asks Ss to
repeat in choral-ind.-and then T.copies on the
board-and does the concept check.


<b>2.Practice : Picture Drill C3 a-f P.148-149</b>
( with work cue Yes/No)


T.asks Ss to practice in pairs.
ExampleExchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach.


S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to.


<b>3.Production: Mapped dialogue </b>


<i>You Your friend </i>


chorus,then answer about the


stress – meaning and copy into the
notebook.


Work in groups tp play this game


Work in individually to answer these
questions by predicting


Listen and check their prediction
,then practice the dialogue


Ss work in pairs reading the text and
answerthe questions .


Ss answer T’s model elicitation
questions-repeat in chral-ind.-copy
into the notebook-answer T’s
questions about concept check.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

see a movie no..go to the beach
No...too hot


go to the museun Yes ...walk
No..go by minibus Yes



T. runs through – elicits the questions and the
answers.Then models- pairwork.


Example Exchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach.


S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to.


Ss answer-listen to T. And then
work in open-closed pairs.


IV.Consolidation:
V.Homework:


-Memorize vocab and read the text again for details and answer the questions.
-Revise Making suggestions with “Let’s…”


-Prepare Unit 14:Making Plans (Grammar Practice)


Date:12.4.2010


Period: 88

<b>UNIT 14</b>

<b>: MAKING PLANS</b>



<i>Lesson 6:</i>

<i>Grammar Practice</i>

<i>(P.150-153)</i>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to Further Practice in some</b>
studied grammar points.


<b> I. Knowledge: Present simple,Adv of frequency.</b>



Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather .
<b> II.Skills: Speaking and writing</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Checking: -Exercise 6 P.124-125 </b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


<b>1 Present simple: Survey</b>
Example Exchange


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

S2: Football.


S1: What sports don’t you like ?
S2: Swimming .


 Like….P  Dislike….


Name Sports Season Food Drink


1.Ha <i>Football</i>P


<i>Swimming</i>


2.
3.



Write-It-Up:


T.asks Ss to write about their friend using the
information from the table.


Example:


Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming.
2.Adverbs of frequency:


T.asks Ss to play the game Slap the board in two teams.
Lu«n lu«n kh«ng bao giê thỉnh thoảng
hai lần một tuần thêng xuyªn mét lần trong năm
<b>3.Grammar practice: </b>


Task 2 P.150* Noughts And Crosses
T.asks Ss to play the game in two teams.


TV? the movies ? the store?
swimming ? your mom? fishing?
table tennis? capming ? badminton ?
Example Exchange


S1: How often do you(go to the movie )?
S2 : Twice a week.


<b>4.Future ‘Going to’: Picture Drill 4 P.151-152 </b>
T.asks Ss to practice in pairs.


Example Exchange



S1: What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to play football.
5 Present Progressive :


T.asks Ss to work in pairs.
Example Exchange


S1 : Hung usually (gets up at 6).


S2: That’s right but today (he is getting up at 7).
a. get up at 6/get up at 7


structure following example
exchange


S1: What sports do you like ?
S2: Football


S1: What sports don’t you like
?


S2: swimming


Work in individually to write
it upfollowing example
exchange


Ha likes football but she
doesn’t like swimming



Work in groups to play this
game


Work in groups to play this
game following example
exchange


S!: How often do you go to
the movie )?


S2 : Twice a week


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange


S1:What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to play
football )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

b. go to school/ go camping


c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic
<b>6.Future Plans and The Weather </b>


T. asks Ss to answer the questions in pairs.
Questions


1. Where are you going to do ?


2.Who are you going to with ?


3.What season are you going to go in?
4.What ‘s the weather like then?


5.What are you going to bring with you ?


Example: I’m going to go to Sapa with my friends. We
are going to in the spring .It’s cool but we like cool
weather ...


S1 : Hung usually gets up at
6 )


S2: That’s right but today he
is ) getting up at 7)


Work in individually toanswer
the questions then write a
pharagraph


<b>IV.Consolidation: (involved)</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


-Revise for One-Period Test.


Date:14.4.2010


Period: 89

<b>ONE-PERIOD TEST</b>




<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to tested some studied</b>
knowledge for grade.


<b> I. Knowledge: Present Simple,Present Progressive ,’Going to’ future…..</b>
<b> II.Skills: writing</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Handing out the papers: </b>


<b> III.Testing:</b>
Questions


<i> I.Chọn đáp án đúng trong số A,B,C,D để hoàn thành các câu sau</i>


1,………… are you going to stay ? - For 4 days.


A.How long B.Where C. When D.What
2,I sometimes ……… to music .


A.am going to listen B am listening C. listens D. listen
3,Let ‘s …………. to the movies.


A. going B. go C. to go D. to going
3,Lan ………… television now.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

A. plays B. does C. has D. play
4,I ………….. Ngoc Son Temple tomorrow .



A. am going visit B. am visiting C. am going to visit D. visit
5, He often has bread and milk…………breakfast.


A. at B. for C. on D. to


6,Are they going to visit Bach Ma Park?


A.Yes,they do. B.Yes, they are. C.No, they don’t. D.Yes, they are going to.


<i>II.Sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh:</i>


1. go / to / next / weekend / are / you / going / where?


-……….………


2. the / it / in / fall / is /cool /often


-……….………


3. time / my / I / free / fishing / go /often / in


-……….………


4. don’t / we / listen / music / why / to ?


-……….………
<i>III.Cho dạng đúng của đọng từ trong ngoặc:</i>


1.I (watch)...a soccer match tonight.
2.She (reads) ...books everyday. .


3.They (swim) ...at the moment.


4. My father often (go) ...fishing in the summer.
5.What about(travel)………by bus?


6.This weekend they(not/have)………....a picnic.
They(see)……….their grandparents.


<i>IV. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân:</i>


1.He go the the cinema once a week.


-……….………


2.Her favorite sport is swimming.


-……….………


3.His pencils are brown.


-……….………


4.Lan is going to live in China.


-……….………
<i>V.Đọcđoạn văn dưới đây và trả lời đúng(T), sai(F)</i>


Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First,
she is going to visit Ha long Bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is
going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi


Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
Questions:


1. She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2. She is going to travel by coach.


3. She is going to visit Da lat for three days.


4. She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
<b>IV. Handing in the papers:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- Prepare for Test-Correction Period.


Date:15.4.2010


Period: 90

<b>TEST CORRECTION</b>



<b>A.OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to corrected the tested papers</b>
for studied knowledge consolidation and for more testing experiences as well.


<b> I. Knowledge: Present Simple,Present Progressive ,’Going to’ future…..</b>
<b> II.Skills: speaking,writing</b>


<b>B.PROCEDURE:</b>


<b> I.Settlement: Greeting and check the attendance</b>
<b> II.Handing out the marked papers: </b>


<b> III.Correction:</b>



<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


<i> I.Chọn đáp án đúng trong số A,B,C,D để hoàn thành</i>
<i>các câu sau</i>


T.asks Ss to scan the questions again and give the
answers for each questionand the reasons for their
choice.


1, A..How long
2, D. listen
3, B. go


3, C. D. is watching
3, A. plays


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
4, C.am going to visit


5, B. for


6, B.Yes, they are.


<i>II.Sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh:</i>


1.Where are you going t o go next weekend?
2. It is often cool in the fall.


3. I often go fishing in my free time .
4. Why don’t we listen to music?



<i>III.Cho dạng đúng của đọng từ trong ngoặc:</i>


1.am going to watch
2.reads .


3.are swimming
4.goes


5.traveling


6.arenot going to have/are going to see


<i>IV. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân:</i>


1.How often does he go to the cinema?
2.What’s her favorite sport ?


3.What color is his pencils?
4.Where is Lan is going to live?


<i>V.Đọcđoạn văn dưới đây và trả lời đúng(T), sai(F)</i>


1.F
2.T
3.T
4.F


Ss work ind/pairs for rearrange
the words/prompts for good


sentences.


Ss work ind/pairs putting the
verbs in correct form.


Ss scan the passage again nad
decide the statements are T/F
again.


<b>IV.Mark reporting:</b>
<b>V.Homework:</b>


<b> -Revise all studied knowledge.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 92</b>


<b>Unit 15 : countries</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 3 :A5 P 156



A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation


I.Knowledges : Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary
<b>II. Skill: writing</b>


<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :



<b>I.</b> <b>Settlement</b>


Greeting


Check attandence
II.Checking :


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Work cue drill:</b>


<b>-Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example exchange :</b>
S1: Where is Hoa from ?


S2: She is from Viet nam


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
S1: What language does she speak ?


S2 : She speaks Viet namese .
a.Hoa/Viet nam


b.Tomiko/ Japan
c.Jo/ Australia
d.John/ Britain
<b>e.Susan/ Canada</b>


<b>2.Pre-writing :</b>
<b>Pre-Teach:</b>


A post card (real):


(to )be on vacation (Example ):
wet (example) :


a lot of (synonym: many):
interesting places (example):


T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


Check: What and where


be on vacation wet interesting places
a lot of


<b>-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with answer</b>
keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan)


b. Where is he ? ( in london)


c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet


d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus )
e. Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh )


Matching





-Asks Ss to put the words into three columns (with answer
keys)


Country City interesting places
Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama
Viet nam Hue The citadel


The USA New york The statue of Liberty
China Beijing The great wall
<b>2 While-writing :</b>


Transformation writing”
-Asks Ss to write


3 Post –wrting :


S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam
S1: What language does
she speak ?


S2 : She speaks Viet
namese .



Ss listen and repeat in


chorus and then


individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in groups to play
this game


Work in pairs to read the
text to answer the
questions (with answer
keys


Work in individually to
put the words into three
columns


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Exhibition


-T corrects their mistakes


board to correct each other


V. Consolidation:



 Vocabulary


V. Homework:


 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34


 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)


<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 93
Unit15 countries


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 3: B1 P. 158</b>


A.Objectives:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative and</b>
superrlative adj of one syllable.


<b> I Knowledges: comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable.</b>
II Skills: Speaking


III Preperation:


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


B.Procedures:



I,Settlement Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary</b>
III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>


<b>1 Revision: Matching</b>


<b>-Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the cities (a</b>
city can have more than one adj


hot Hue
wet HCM city
cold Hoi an
big Sapa
small Ha noi
<b> long xuyen</b>
<b>2 Presentation :</b>


<b>Presentation Text </b>


-Reads the text, asks Ss to practice


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Models :</b>


1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder


2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest
<b>Note:</b>


Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger
<b>3 Practice: word cue drill</b>


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange


S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang
S2: But HCM city is the biggest


a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big)
b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod )
c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small)
d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet)
<b>4 Further practice : Answer given</b>


_T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with answer
keys


a. Phanxipang What’s the tallest mountain in Viet nam?
b.The Mekong What’s the biggest river in Viet nam?


c.Hue What’s the wettest city in Viet nam?
d.Sapa Whast’s the clodest town in Viet nam?
e.HCM city What’s the biggest city in Viet nam?


<b>-Asks Ss to play Noughts and crosses by comparing their</b>
home town with towm in the box



Ha noi Hue Sapa
HCM city Da nang Hoi an
Hai phong Can tho Da lat


Listen and copy down the
models


Work in pair to practice the
structure following exaple
exchange


S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da
nang


S2: But HCM city is the
biggest


Work in pairs to make
questions


Work in groups to play game
Example :


Ha noi is bigger than Quang
tri


IV Consolidation:
Check the models
V. Homework:



23 Do ex 1,2 P 129
24 Prepare Lesson 4


<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 94


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 4: B2-5 P. 159-161</b>


A.Objectives:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read facts about famous places in the world</b>
and practice comparatives


<b> I Knowledges: comparative .</b>
II Skills: Reading and Speaking
III Preperation:


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


B.Procedures:


I,Settlement Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write the sentences from the cue words</b>
Ha noi / small/ Hcm city



HCM city /biggest city
III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>


<b>1 Revision: Lucky numbers </b>


<b>-Asks Ss to play this game by asking and answering</b>
questions


1.What’s the biggest city in Viet nam ? (HCM )
<b>2.What’s the biggest city in Britain? (Lon don)</b>
<b>3.What’s the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo)</b>
<b>4.LN</b>


<b>5.What’s the tallest mountain you know?</b>
<b>6.LN</b>


<b>7.What’s the wettest you know?</b>


<b>8.Which one ‘s colder : Can tho or Sapa?</b>
<b>2 Pre-reading :</b>


<b>*Pre -teach:</b>


high (example) : cao
long (mime) : dµi
thick (example): dµy
over



a million (translation) : mét triÖu


-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : Wordsquare </b>
_Asks Ss to find out the words


Work in groups to play this
game


1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5


Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

W
E


T
B
I
G
C
T
H
I
C
K
L
O
N
G
E
R
L
V
O
L
D
X
A
E
D
L
O
C
T
R

H
I
G
H
Keys :


wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high




over,big, do, no




notebooks


Work in groups to find out the
words


Work in individually to put the
cities in order : biggest first


Work in individually to answer
the questions in B2 P.159


Work in individuallylook at the
text to guess the meaning of
1 a population 2 the capital
city 3 a building



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

cool tall cold


  


Odering:


_Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first
HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO.
<b>3While-reading :B2 P.159</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order
<b>Keys : </b>


1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM, 5-HANOI
-Asks Ss to answer the questions in B2 P.159


Answer Keys :
a.No,it is not
b.It’s MEXICO


c. Tokyo is bigger than London


<b>4 Post -reading : guess from the cotext</b>


-Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess the
meaning of


1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building
4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure



_


IV Consolidation:


Check vocabulary
V. Homework:


25 Do ex 3 P.129-130
26 Prepare Lesson 5


<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 95


Unit15 countries


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 5: C1-2 P. 162-164</b>


A.Objectives:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use “ lots of...” as a quantitier</b>
<b> I Knowledges: Lots of , Geography vocabulary .</b>


II Skills: Speaking and writing
III Preperation:


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


B.Procedures:



I,Settlement Greeting


Check attandence


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: Slap the board </b>


<b>-Asks Ss to play this game by listening and slapping in the</b>
words


beautiful green rivers lakes


beaches fields
mountains


<b>2 Presentation :</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>


a forest (picture): cánh rừng
a desert ( translation): sa mạc
(to ) rain ( picture ): ma


great (adj) (example): vÜ dong¹i ,to lín
lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiÒu
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually



-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : R.O.R</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question
What are the 6 ‘natural features’ Lan tells us about ?
<b>Keys : </b>


<b> 1 mountains 4 rain</b>
2 rivers 5 forest
3 lakes 6 forest
<b>Model sentences :</b>


We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests.
Rain.


<b>3 Practice : Picture drill C2 P.164</b>


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :


S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of mountains ) ?
S2: Yes, it does .


T/F repetition drill:


-Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which T
reads is right and keep silent if it wrong



Work in groups to play this
game


Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks


Work in groups to play this
game


Work in individually to read the
text to answer the question
‘’What are the 6 ‘natural
features’ Lan tells us about ?’'


Listen and copy down it


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :


S1 : Does Viet nam have lots
of mountains ) ?


S2: Yes, it does .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
Example :



T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang
<b> There are lots of forests in Ha noi</b>
There are lots of lakes in Ha noi
<b>4 Production : Noughts and Crosses</b>


<b>-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example</b>
exchange :


S1: Are there any forests) in Viet nam?
S2: Yes/ No, there are.


Mountains rivers forests


Beaches rain building


Trees interesting places lakes


Repeat
silent
Repeat


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :


S1: Are there any forests) in
Viet nam?



S2: Yes/ No, there are.


IV Consolidation:


Check vocabulary and the structure have lots of + nouns
V. Homework:


27 Do ex 1,2 P.130
28 Prepare Lesson 6


<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 96


Unit15 countries


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 6: C3 P. 165</b>


A.Objectives:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the world’s great rives and</b>
mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and
superlatives


<b> I Knowledges: .comparatives and superlatives </b>
II Skills: Reading


III Preperation:


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book



B.Procedures:


I,Settlement Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<b> II,Checking. Asks Ss to write sentences with the cue words </b>
Viet nam /have /lots of/ rain


<b> </b>III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>


<b>1 Revision: Wordsquare</b>


<b>-Asks Ss to find out the words in the box </b>
R


I
V
E
R
S
W
C
M
S
T
A
R
T


S
H
E
L
B
E
A
C
H
I
T
R
E
E
I
G
I
N
E
I
R


Work in individually to find out
the words


Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, and in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks



Work in groups to play this
game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
O


N
E
G
A
R
G
L
O
T
S
H
I
S
D
L
R
O
W
X
F


<b>Answer keys :</b>


great, long world girl



  


meters, rain, high, China, of, or




river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on




<b>2 Pre-reading:</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>


the sea (picture): biÓn


Tibet ( translation): tây tạng
(to ) flow to ( mime): chả
North Afica: b¾c mü


-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : What and Where</b>



the sea Tibet North Afica


Work in pairs to read the text to
check their predictions and then
read the text again to answer the
question in the text book


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>T/ F predictions:</b>


-Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F
1. There are two great rivers in viet nam.


2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river .
3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in China
4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam
5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world
<b>3While -reading : C3 p.165</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s
<b>Answer keys : 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the question in
the text book C3 P. 165


<b>Answer keys </b>


a.The Mekong river



b.The Mekong starts in Tibet


c.The Nile river is the longest in the world


d.The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean sea
E Moun Everest is the highest mountain in the world
f Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet nam
<b>4 Post-reading : Lucky number</b>


-Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these questions .
a.LN


b.What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ?
c.Where does the Red river start ?


d.LN


e.What does the Red river flow to ?
f.W hat does the Nile start and flow to ?
g.LN


h.Make a sentences about the lonhest river in Viet
nam?




IV Consolidation:


Check vocabulary
V. Homework:



29 Do ex 3 P.130


30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1


<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 97</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<b> </b>

Lesson 1 :A1-3 P 166-167



A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and uncountable
quantifiers


I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few
<b>II. Skill: speaking</b>


<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :


<b> I. Settlement</b>
II.Checking :
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


Teacher’s activities <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Jumble Words:</b>



<b>-Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order </b>


toespota = potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers
motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions
tableveges = vegetables


<b>2.Presentation :</b>


<b>Presentation text : A1 p.166</b>


<b>-Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the text</b>
Model sentences :


a. How much rice is there ?
<b> There is some </b>


<b> A lot of </b>


<b> A little rice</b>
b.How many eggs are there ?


There are some


Alot of eggs
A few


<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>


-Asks Ss to match the sentences to the
<b>Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e</b>


<b>Picture drill: </b>


A1 p.166 and A3 P.167


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange :
S 1: How much rice is there?


S2: There is alot/ lots


S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are a few


Work in groups to
rewrite the words in the
order


Ss listen , and practice the
text ,then give examples
Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in pairs to match


Work in pairs to to
practice the structure
following example
exchange :


S1: How much ricwe is
there?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

<b>4 Production</b> :


Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game


Example : S1 : There is a little rice


S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes


S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a few
eggs


S2 : There are afew


Work in groups to play
chain game


IV. Consolidation:


 Vocabulary


V. Homework:


 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34


 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)


<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 98</b>



<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 2 :A2 P 166-167



A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text
about farming and getting further practice in alot, alittle, a few


I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few
<b> II. Skill: reading</b>


<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :


<b>I.</b> <b>Settlement</b>


<b> Greeting</b>


Check attandence
II.Checking :


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1 Revision :</b>


<b>Noughts and crosses :</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
a dozen eggs two potatoes 1/2 a glass of milk


1/2 kilo onions 100 g rice 4 kilos vegetables
1 kilo fruit 2 tomatoes 2 flowers
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>


<b>Pre-Teach</b>


animals (picture):
a buffalow (picture):
a cow (picture):
( to ) flow (picture):
(to ) pull a cart (picture):
(to ) grow (picture):
(to ) procedure (picture):


<b>- T uses the techniques to elicit each word</b>


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


Check: Net work


animals


grow on the farm


fruit / rice / vegetables procedure
*open -prediction :


-Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5
things he has procedures with answer keys


Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures
1 paddy fields rice


2 a small vegetable field vegetables
3 fruit trees fruit


4 buffalow milk
5 cows eggs
6 chickens


<b>3 While -reading:</b>


-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>


-Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture
<b>Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e</b>


rice)''


Ss listen and repeat in chorus


and then individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in individually to write
vocab


Work in groups to predict 6
things Mr Hai has on his farm
and 5 things he has procedures


Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Picture drill: </b>


A1 p.166 and A3 P.167


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :


S 1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots


S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are afew


<b>4 Production</b> :



Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice


S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :


S1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots


S1: How many onions are
there ?


S2 : There are a few


Work in groups to play chain
game


IV. Consolidation:


 Vocabulary


V. Homework:



 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34


 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)


<b>Date: 29/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 99</b>


<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 3 :A4-5 P 168



A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas in terms
of cause and effectof the text about the environment


I.Knowledges : Why ...? Because ...
<b> II. Skill: reading</b>


<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :


II. <b>Settlement Greeting</b>


Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1 Revision :matching </b>



<b>-Asks Ss to match Viet namese with EL words </b>
the population rõng forests


trång


the world nông dân farmer
grow d©n sè fields
con vËt


food thức ăn animals
thÕ giíi


<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-Teach</b>


land (picture): dongÊt dongai
plants(picture): thùc vËt


( to )burn (picture): dongèt ch¸y
(to ) destroy( translation): ph¸ hủ


(to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): chặt phá
in danger( example): mèi nguy hiÓm
<b>- T uses the techniques to elicit each word</b>


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress



T asks Ss to copy


Check: What and where


land plants burn


destroy in danger cut down


<b>ordering:</b>


-Asks Ss order the words


1.produce 2.cut down 3. more food 4.
burn


<b>5. grow 6. make new fields 7. animals and plants</b>
in danger.


<b>3 While -reading: A4 p. 168</b>


-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the
questions


<b>Answer keys :</b>


Work in groups to match Viet namese


with EL words


Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
then individually


Ss copy down on their notebook


Work in groups to play this game


Work in groups order the words
5-3- 2- 6 -1-7


Listen and reads the text to check
their predictions


Then answer the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

1.Because we grow trees
<b>2.Because we need wood</b>


<b>3.Because we are destroyingthe forests </b>
<b>4 Post -reading : Picture story </b>


Asks Ss to retell story,using their words


IV. Consolidation:


 Vocabulary


V. Homework:



 Prepare Unit 16 Lesson4
 Do ex (work book)


<b>Date: 29/4</b>
<b> Period 100</b>


<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 4 :B1 P 169



A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas about the
pollution


I.Knowledges : pollution vocabulary
<b> II. Skill: reading</b>


<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :


III. <b>Settlement Greeting</b>


Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>



<b>1 Revision :STB</b>


<b>-Asks Ss to play this game </b>


phá huỷ dongốn cây s¶n xuÊt convËt


mèi nguy hiÓm dongèt ch¸y c©y dongÊt


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

dongai


<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-Teach</b>


The enviroment (trasnlation): m«i trờng
The ocean (synomyn: sea ): dongại dơng
( to) pollute (example):oo nhiƠm


(to) waste (translation): l¶ng phí
the air(example): không khí


coal( realia): than dongá
oil( realia):dầu


gas (translation): ga
power (example ):


<b>- T uses the techniques to elicit each word</b>


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in


chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


Check: What and where



gas oil coal


the air waste ocean power


<b>Pre questions -Predict :</b>


-Asks SS to predict the answers with answer keys
1.What are we destroying ?


- forests, wild animals, plants
2.What are we wasting ?


- water, coal, oil , gas
3. What are we polluting ?


- the air, the land, the rivers, the oceans
<b>3 While -reading: B1 P.169</b>


-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>Answer keys :</b>



<b>4.a. Because we are destroying </b>
<b>5.b. Gases is polluting the air </b>
<b>6.c. </b>


<b>4 Post -reading : Write it up </b>


-Asks Ss to use the predict pre questions to make a list of
‘’ don’ts ‘’


<b>Example : Don’t destroy our environment </b>


Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in groups to play this
game


Work in groups to predict the
answers


Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions


Then answer the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

Don’t destroy the forest


Don’t destroy the plants


<b> Don’t destroythe wild animals </b>
Don’t waste water


Don’t pollute the air
Don’t pollute the oceans


IV. Consolidation:


 Vocabulary


V. Homework:


 Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5
 Do ex (work book)


<b>Date: 29/4</b>
<b> Period 101</b>


<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171



A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to give advice about protecting the environment
I.Knowledges : Should and shouldn’t.


<b> II. Skill: Speaking</b>



<b> III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,.</b>
B. Procedures :


IV. <b>Settlement Greeting</b>


Check attandence
II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1 Revision :Noughts and crosses </b>


<b>-Asks Ss to play this game by using ‘’Don’t ...’’ </b>
plants water the air
power wild animals the oceans
forests coal trash


Example : Don’t destroy plants


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

<b>2.Presentation :B2 P.170-171</b>


-Reads the text , asks Ss to guess the new words from
context with answer keys


(to) throw = nÐm
(to) pick = nhỈt



(to) damage= phá huỷ, làm hỏng
(to) keep off = tránh khỏi


(to) save = tiÕt kiÖm
(to) collect = thu gom


-Asks Ss to match the rulres with these signs
<b>Answer keys :</b>


a- picture c b- picture f c- picture a d- picture h
e- picture e f- picture b g - pictureg h- picture d
*Model sentences :


We should collect paper
Save water


We shouldn’t throw trash on the streets
damage trees.


<b>3 Practice: </b>


-Asks Ss to match and write these sentences with should
and shouldn’t


<b>7.Example :</b>


8.We should collect paper


Should damage trash
9. collect trees



10. throw paper


Shouldn’t save flowers
11. pick bottles and cans


<b>Picture drill :</b>


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
S1: We shouldn’t damage trees )


S2: That’s right


<b>4 Further practice : Noughts and crosses </b>
-Asks Ss to play this game


damage save waster
destroy pollute collect
throw cut down pick
Example : We should/shouldn’t ....


Ss listen and guess the new
words from context


Work in individually tomatch
the rulres with these signs


Listen and copy donw the
sentences



Work in individually to match
and write these sentences with
should and shouldn’t


We should collect paper
We shouldn’t throw trash


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
S1: We shouldn’t damage
trees )


S2: That’s right


Work in groups to play this
game


IV. Consolidation:


 Vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

 Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5
 Do ex (work book)


<b>Date: 2/5/2007</b>
<b> Period 103</b>


<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171




A Objective:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and
progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability.


I.Knowledges :


Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary.
<b> II.Skill: </b>


Speaking and writing
<b> III.Preparation : </b>
Book, board, lesson plan,.
B. Procedures :


<b>I.Settlement Greeting</b>


Check attandence
II.Checking :


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>


<b>1. Countries and Languages:</b>
<b>*Simple present :</b>


<b>-T recalls the way to use this tense </b>
Form: S + V-s/es



Uses: miêu tả hành dongộng thờng xuyên xÃy ra
Countries and Languages




Japanese
Japan


-Ask ss to do exercise 1p.174 (text book)
Answerkey:


a.Are... from/ Am not/ speak
b.Speaks


c.Is Chinese e.Is Vietnamese
d.Is Japanese f.Is American


<b>2.Present simple and present progressive:</b>
+Mapped dialogue:


 



T-Whole class


Work in groups to to do exercise 1p.174
(text book)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

<b>...name? Susan</b>
...Live ? London


...Stay now? Hanoi
...do ? Teacher
What....teach ? English


...teach you? No, ...Mr Hai
Answer key:


1.What is her name?
2.Where does she live?
3.Where is she staying now?
4.What does she do?


5.What does she teach?
6.Does she teach you?


-ask ss to do the exercise 2 P.174 (text book)
<b>3.Adj: Comparative and superlatives:</b>


-Asks Ss to complete the table and then complete
the passages.


Long
Longer
Longest
Short
Tall
Small
Big
High
Thick



a.The Mekong river is long. The Amazon
river is ...than the Mekong. The Nile river
is...river in the world.


b.The Great Wall of China is long. It is... ...
structure in the world


c.Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isn’t ....
... building in the world. Petronas twin
Tower in Kuala Lumpur is .... than Sears
Tower. It is ... ... building in the world.
d.Ha noi is gig, bt it is not the .... city in Viet


nam. HCMC is ... than Hanoi. It is ... city
invietnam. But Mexico city is.. ...city in


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

the world.


IV. Consolidation:
Vocabulary


</div>

<!--links-->

×